JP6493375B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when ball entrance gaming ball on startup port, spruce gaming is the lottery, award game that when drawing result was hit is made in favor of the player There Yu technique machine that runs have been proposed.

JP 2003-265765 A

  However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the interest of games.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, the first flow path, and the second flow path. A distribution unit capable of distributing to one of the flow paths, a first distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path are set. Based on the distribution state setting means and the game balls entering the first flow path, the game balls that have not entered the first flow path or the second flow path are variable so that they can enter the ball. The first ball entry means and the game ball that has not entered the first flow channel or the second flow channel can enter based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow channel. First discrimination is made on the basis of a second ball entry means that is variable and a game ball that has not entered the first flow path or the second flow path enters the first ball entry means. Run Preparative a first determination means which is capable, on the second ball entrance means, said first flow path or game balls that did not ball entrance to the second flow path based on the fact that the ball entrance, a second determination A second discriminating means that can be executed, and a result of the first discrimination by the first discriminating means is a specific first discrimination result or a result of the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is a specific second discrimination When the result is a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and the second determination means results in a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, the game A special game execution means for executing a special game that allows a game ball to enter a region in which a game ball can enter a specific region where a right to execute the privilege game is granted to a person, The special game gives the right to execute the bonus game, After award game of is performed, and setting means for setting one of said first sorting with said second sorting condition, and has a.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect , further comprising display means capable of displaying the first determination result and the second determination result.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, the second flow path different from the first flow path, and one of the first flow path and the second flow path. And a distribution state setting for setting a first distribution state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path. And a first entry in which a game ball that has not entered the first flow path or the second flow path can be changed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first flow path. Based on the ball means and the game ball having entered the second flow path, a second game ball that has not entered the first flow path or the second flow path is variable so that it can enter the second flow path. It is possible to execute the first determination based on a ball entering means and a game ball that has not entered the first flow path or the second flow path entered the first ball entering means. First size And means, in said second ball entrance means, the game balls that did not ball entrance to the first passage or the second flow path based on the fact that the ball entrance, a capable of executing a second determination Game when the result of the first determination by the two determination means and the first determination means becomes a specific first determination result or the result of the second determination by the second determination means becomes a specific second determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player and a special second discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result by the second discrimination means; A special game execution means for executing a special game that allows the game ball to enter a region where the game ball can enter the specific region where the right to be granted is granted, and the special game allows the bonus game to be The right to be executed is granted and the bonus game is executed After being, setting means for setting one of said first sorting with said second sorting condition, and has a. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has a display means capable of displaying the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination result and the second determination result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a front view inside the distribution winning device in the first embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the distribution entry port in the first embodiment, and (c) is the first It is a perspective view of the rotary body in 1 embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 1st Embodiment. . It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, and a holding ball storage area. It is a figure which shows the content of RAM in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the content of ROM in the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a response | compatibility with the 1st per random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment, and the jackpot judgment value of a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit | special type counter C2 and jackpot type in 1st Embodiment, (d) These are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 in 1st Embodiment, and the determination value per normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a response | compatibility with the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of big hit in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the first embodiment, (D) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding | compatible relationship between the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of deviation (probability change) in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the gate control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning detection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning detection end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of a continuous winning prize performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of probability variation winnings performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a front view inside the distribution winning device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the display screen which shows the continuation chance in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the display screen which shows the probability change chance in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which illustrated this. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the display screen which shows the continuation determination in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the display screen which shows the probability change confirmation in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which illustrated this. (A) is a front view of the inside of the distribution winning device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the inside of the distribution winning device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is front sectional drawing of the distribution prize-winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an upper surface sectional view of a distribution prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus of the La-La cross section in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is 1st in 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st winning type counter C2 and jackpot type in 2nd Embodiment, (c) is the winning opening and payout ball | bowl in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a number. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 3rd Embodiment. . It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination processing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification reception process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous display determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the increase time reserved symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time-decreasing reservation symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the electric power release pattern in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transfer of the gaming state in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the selection table for special figure 1 in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the selection table for special figure 2 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transfer of the gaming state in 5th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed typically the electrical structure in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the type selection table for special figure 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the type selection table for special figure 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a first per-random number table in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of a first per-kind selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a second per-random number table. (D) is a schematic diagram of a first small hit type selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 6th execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning prize process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot setting process at the time of V passing performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning prize completion process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a time reduction number selection table in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process at the time of winning performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is the elements on larger scale of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the allocation prize-winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition transition of the gaming state in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st hit random number table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of a 1st hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figure 1 in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figure 2. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figure 2 in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the game board of the modification in 8th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (c) are distributed prize winning devices 650. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails, winning holes 63 and 64, a distribution winning device 650 having a probable rotating body 900 and a continuous rotating body 901, and the like can be attached to and detached from the inner frame 12 from the back side. It is attached to. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. For example, the frame button 22 is used to input game information on a game information input screen displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later, to change the stage of the production, or to produce a super reach. It is operated by the player when changing the contents.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed in accordance with the entry to the first prize opening 64a or the second prize opening 64b (start winning prize) to be described later are adapted to the theme given to each stage. Designed to be done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The prize winning port 64a, the second prize winning port 64b, the normal prize winning port 67, the distribution prize winning device 650, the variable prize winning device 165, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. It is done. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, the second winning port 64b, the normal winning port 67, the variable winning device 165, the variable display device unit 80, and the distribution winning device 650 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first winning port 64a, a special symbol 1 (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second winning port 64b. The lottery of special symbol 2 (one of the first symbols) is performed. When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn and a ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the jackpot game, a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot are executed. In this embodiment, a minimum of 8 rounds of jackpot is guaranteed. If a winning is made to the continuation port 901a of the continuous rotating body 901 during the 8th round, 8 rounds of jackpot game are added, and a total of 16 rounds of jackpot game is played. Granted to a person.

  In the present embodiment, the first round is composed of a maximum of 15 seconds from the 1st round to the 8th round, and the total number of game balls won in the second specific entrance 650a is 5 seconds after 15 seconds have elapsed. The distribution winning device 650 is set in an open state until reaching the ball. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between rounds is set to 5 seconds. Here, both the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901 arranged in the allocation prize-winning device 650 are rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds. Therefore, when the interval of 5 seconds elapses, the probability variation rotation is performed. The game ball held and rotated by the body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 can be in a discharged state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being held by the probability variation rotator 900 or the continuous rotator 901 across rounds.

  In the present embodiment, the allocation winning device 650 is opened from the first round to the eighth round, and the variable winning device 165 is opened from the ninth round to the sixteenth round. First, the distribution winning device 650 is set to the open state and the variable winning device 165 is set to the closed state until 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round, and until 15 to 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round. The allocation winning device 650 may be set in a closed state, and the variable winning device 165 may be set in an open state.

  With this configuration, it is possible to divide the period during which game balls are awarded to the allocation prize winning device 650 and the period during which game balls are awarded to the variable prize winning device 165, and the prize winning device that the player has won is determined. You can choose to play games. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening width of the second specific entrance 650a of the distribution variable winning device 1650 is made smaller than the opening width of the specific entrance 165a of the variable winning device 165, so that it is difficult for a game ball to enter. It is configured. As a result, the digestion time of the jackpot game becomes long. However, when 15 seconds elapses, the variable winning device 165 that allows a game ball to enter easily is released, so that the digestion time of the jackpot game can be shortened.

  In addition, although it set so that the prize-winning apparatus opened | released by 15 seconds after the start of 1 round and after it may be switched, it may set so that it may switch every 3 seconds, for example, You may comprise so that it may set with a period other than. In addition, although the release cycle is the same in all rounds, the present invention is not limited to this, and the release cycle (timing) may be changed for each round.

  Further, it may be configured to switch to opening of the variable prize winning device 165 based on having entered the continuation opening 901a, or when entering the continuation opening 901a, the player enters a probability changing opening 900a to be described later. If not, the opening of the distribution winning device 650 may be continued, and the variable winning device 165 may be opened only when the game ball has already entered the probability variation opening 900a.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (normal entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. become. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 64b, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As the special symbol jackpot type, one type of jackpot type “jackpot A” is set (see FIG. 9C). As described above, the jackpot type of the “jackpot A” is a jackpot game of at least 8 rounds, and is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game of up to 16 rounds. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the start of the “big hit A” is always determined. And in this jackpot A, the distribution winning device 650 is opened from 1 round to 8 rounds. In the 8-round jackpot game, when a game ball is detected by a continuation switch (not shown) when a game ball enters the continuation port 901a and a jackpot game of 9 to 16 rounds is awarded, a variable prize is awarded. Device 165 is opened.

  From the 1st round to the 8th round, the slide member 670 of the allocation prize winning device 650 is slid in the rear side direction of the game board 13 so that the game ball can enter the second specific entrance 650a. Is set. This open state is set to a closed state when five game balls enter the second specific entrance 650a or the open state continues for 15 seconds, and one round of jackpot game is completed. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between rounds is set to 5 seconds.

  From the 9th round to the 16th round, the open / close door of the variable prize-winning device 165 is rotated to the front side to be in an open state, and the game balls flowing down the front side of the game board 13 are received by the open / close doors, and specific entry The game ball is guided to the inside of the mouth 165a. Here, when the variable winning device 165 is in the open state, when 10 game balls enter the specific entrance 165a or when the open state has elapsed for 30 seconds, the open / close door is rotated upright and closed. Set to state. The interval time between the 9th and 16th rounds is set to 3 seconds. As a result, the time between the 9th and 16th rounds is shorter than that between the 1st and 8th rounds. In addition, since the variable winning device 165 has a larger opening width of the specific entrance 165a than the distribution winning device 650, it is easy for game balls to enter and shorten the one round of digestion time. it can. In addition, the size of the specific entrance 650a of the allocation prize winning device 650 is set to a size that allows one game ball to enter as shown in FIG. It has become.

  With reference to FIG. 3, the details of the distribution winning device 650 disposed on the game board 13 will be described. FIGS. 3A to 3C are diagrams for explaining the details of the distribution winning device 650. FIG. The distribution winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening hole processed by a router. The distribution prize winning device 650 is configured from the front surface side of the base plate 651 with substantially the same outer shape as the base plate 651, and is fitted with the base plate 651 to form an area in which a game ball can flow inside. A body 652;

  FIG. 3A is a front view of the distribution winning device 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. On the upper part of the base plate 651, a specific ball entrance 650a, which is an opening capable of entering one game ball and can be entered, is formed to protrude to the front side. Above the specific entrance 650a, a slide member 670 that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter the specific entrance 650a and a state in which the game cannot be entered slides in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Arranged to be possible. This slide member 670 is connected to a solenoid arranged on the back side of the base plate 651 by a connecting member. When the solenoid is not activated, the slide member 670 protrudes to the front side of the game board and is specified. It is set so as to prevent a game ball from entering the entrance 650a. When the solenoid is excited and actuated, the slide member 670 is moved to the back side of the game board 13 by the connecting member, and the specific entrance 650a is set in an open state.

  A flow path through which a game ball that has entered the specific entrance 650a can flow down is formed by a flow path wall portion 653 protruding to the front side. This flow path wall 653 is formed with a width (15 mm in this embodiment) that allows one game ball to flow down (diameter 11 mm), and forms a flow path directly downward from the sorting inlet 650a. Thereafter, a flow path is formed that branches the flowing down game ball into the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655. A magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path directly downward from the distribution entrance port 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the distribution entrance port 650a. A wall portion is not formed on the surface of the flow path where the branching point is opposed, and the rotational distribution member 800 is disposed. The rotational distribution member 800 is configured to have the same width as the protruding width of the flow path wall portion 653, and a shaft portion 800a is formed to be fixed to the base plate 651 so as to be rotatable. On the back side of the base plate 651, a sorting motor 270a that is a motor for rotating the rotary sorting member 800 is provided.

  The distribution motor 270a is controlled to rotate by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 rotates the rotation distribution member 800 to the right by 30 degrees (position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 3A) and rotates to the left by 30 degrees ( The distribution motor 270a is driven and rotated every 5 seconds to the position indicated by the dotted line in FIG. That is, the state in which the game balls are distributed to the left channel 654 and the state in which the game balls are allocated to the right channel 655 are switched every 5 seconds. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 turns on the pachinko machine 10 and executes the gate control process (S1104) of the main process (see FIG. 22), which will be described later. At this time, the distribution motor 270a is driven and controlled so as to rotate the rotation distribution member 800 repeatedly. Although details will be described later, the gate timing counter 203k of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to be backed up even when the power is cut off. Counting is resumed from this state, and the rotation distribution member 800 is rotated.

  Therefore, the rotation distribution member 800 is not driven at the same timing every time after the power is turned on, but can be made different depending on the state at the time of power interruption. Therefore, even if power is turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once, the operation timing of the rotary sorting member 800 can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation period of the rotation distribution member 800 is fixed at 5 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flow direction is determined when a random number or the like is selected and a predetermined determination value is obtained. It is good also as a structure driven to change. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that another pachinko machine 10 and a drive period synchronize. Therefore, it is possible to have different game play depending on the selection of the pachinko machine 10.

  A continuous rotating body 901 is pivotally supported with respect to the base body 651 below the left channel opening 654a which is the lower end portion of the left channel. The continuous rotating body 901 is rotated leftward by a first rotating motor 270b disposed on the back side of the base body 651 at a rotation speed of 1 rotation 5 seconds. In addition, the probability variation rotator 900 is pivotally supported by the base body 651 at the right channel 655a which is the lower end of the right channel 655. The probability variation rotator 900 is rotated at a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds in the right direction by a second rotation motor 270c disposed on the back side of the base body 651. The probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901 have the same shape.

  Here, with reference to FIG.3 (c), the shape of this probability variation | mutation rotation body 900 and the continuous rotation body 901 is demonstrated. FIG. 3C is a perspective view of the probability variation rotator 900 (continuous rotator 901). The probability variation rotator 900 has a circular outer shape, and has a thickness equivalent to one game ball. Around the periphery, there are formed recesses into which game balls can enter at four locations, top, bottom, left and right. The concave portion provided in the periphery is composed of one probability variation opening 900a and three rotation entrances 900b to 900d. The probability variation opening 900a is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the back side of the probability variation rotating body 900 so that the game ball can be guided to the probability variation flow path port 901k provided in the base plate 651. Moreover, the wall part which prevents guide | inducing a game ball to the probability variation | change flow path port 901k is arrange | positioned at the back side by the rotation entrances 900b-900d. Further, the continuous rotating body 901 has the same configuration as that of the probability variation rotating body 900. In the continuous rotating body 901, the probability variation opening 900a is formed as the continuing opening 901a.

  In a state in which the probability variation rotator 900 rotates to a position where the opening of the probability variation port 900a faces the right flow channel port 655a, the game ball that has flowed down the right flow channel 655 is able to enter the probability variation port 900a. The probability variation rotator 900 is always rotated rightward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds per rotation, and when a game ball enters the probability variation port 900a while being rotated, the probability variation port 900a holds the game ball. In this state, when it turns to the right and the probability variation opening 900a faces downward (position shown in FIG. 3 (a)), the game ball in the probability variation opening 900a flows down to the probability variation flow passage port 900k. The game ball that has flowed into the probability variation channel port 900k is detected by a probability variation switch (magnetic sensor) (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 13. When a game ball is detected by this probability change switch, a probability change flag 203p, which will be described later, is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and 100 is set to the probability change counter 203g at the end of the big hit game (ending timing). Thus, during the period until the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game, a high probability game state (probability game state) in which the jackpot probability is high is set.

  In addition, when the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 655 enters any of the rotation entrances 900b to 900d of the probability variation rotator 900, the probability variation rotator 900 rotates in the left direction, and the probability variation flow path port 900k. Even if it is rotated to the position, the back side wall portion of the rotation entrance 900b cannot flow the game ball to the probability variation passage port 900k, and the game balls in the rotation entrance 900b to 900d are moved to the discharge passage 656. Discharge. The game ball discharged to the discharge flow path 656 flows down the discharge flow path 656 and is discharged to the back side of the game board 13 from the discharge port 657 formed at the lower end portion of the discharge flow path 656. It is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 (island equipment side) by a flow path (not shown) arranged on the back side.

  Thus, the probability variation rotator 900 is always rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 is also rotated every 5 seconds to switch the distribution direction. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot game, the opportunity for a game ball to enter the probability variation entrance 900k is set once in a round, and the player is expected to have a chance of a probability variation game. Can do. Therefore, even during the jackpot game that is executed in the case of a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to be interested in whether or not a probability change game is given, and the effect of improving the interest of the player during the jackpot is there.

  The continuous rotating body 901 is always rotated in the left direction at a rotation speed of 1 rotation 5 seconds. Therefore, similarly to the probability variation rotator 900, when a game ball that has flowed down the left channel 654 enters the continuation port 901a, the game ball is rotated leftward with the game ball held in the continuation port 901a, and the continuation channel The game ball inside the continuation port 901a is caused to flow down to the continuation channel 901k at a position facing the 901k. The game ball that has flowed into the continuous old flow path 901k flows down to the back side of the game board 13 and is detected by a continuation switch (magnetic sensor) (not shown) and then to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (island equipment side). Discharged.

  Here, when a game ball is detected by the continuation switch, a round start flag 203m described later is turned on by the MPU 201 of the main control device 113. When the round start flag 203m is set to ON, when the current round number is less than 16 rounds, the start of the next round is set.

  In this way, the continuous rotating body 901 is rotated at a rotational speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 also switches the distribution direction every 5 seconds. Since the continuation port 901a faces the left channel port 654a in a state in which the game balls are distributed to 654, the player can have an expectation that the next round will be set (continued). Therefore, even during the jackpot game, it is possible to play the game with interest in the flow of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored during the jackpot.

  Further, the probability variation rotator 900 is rotated as described above by the first rotation motor 270b (see FIG. 6) configured by a stepping motor. Similarly, the continuous rotating body 901 is rotated by a second rotating motor 270c (see FIG. 6) configured by a stepping motor. Here, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in the process of S1011 in the start-up process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901 are initially set. Operation settings are executed. The initial operation is set by setting the origin positions of the first rotating motor 270b and the second rotating body motor 270c (the origin positions of the probability variation rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body).

  The probability variation rotator 900 is provided with a detection piece (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft 900z on the back side of the base plate 651. The detection piece (not shown) is detected by the photo sensor when the probability variation port 900a of the probability variation rotator 900 is turned to the position facing the probability variation channel port 900k (see FIG. 3A) described above. It is configured. In the initial operation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the probability variation rotator 900 is rotated to the right, and the photo sensor (not shown) detects the detection piece (not shown). The operation of the first rotary motor 270b is stopped and the step counter is set to zero. This step counter is a counter for controlling the operation of the first rotary motor 270b, and is configured to be able to determine the rotation position of the probability variation rotator 900 based on the number of counters. Similarly, with respect to the initial operation of the continuous rotating body 900, the second rotation motor 270c is rotated leftward, and when the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor, the operation is stopped, and the step for the second rotation motor 270c is performed. The counter is set to zero. Also in the continuous rotating body 901, the position where the detection piece is detected by the photosensor is a position where the continuous flow path 901k and the continuous port 901a face each other.

  In this embodiment, the rotation speeds of the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotation body 901 are constant. However, the rotation speeds of the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotation body 901 are not limited to this, and are determined by lottery when the power is turned on. You may comprise so that it may determine by lottery. Moreover, you may comprise so that a rotational speed may change with the time (for example, every hour) after a power supply is turned on. In such a configuration, when the rotation speed is set to be fast for one hour at the time of power-on, there are many opportunities to enter the probability changing port 900a or the continuation port 901a in the time zone immediately after the rotation. Thus, a period advantageous to the player can be set.

  In a probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) in which a special symbol lottery probability is set to a high probability, the special symbol lottery probability is low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after the jackpot game. ) To 1/40 of the high probability gaming state (probability gaming state). In the probability variation gaming state, a short-time gaming state (a period in which the probability of normal symbols is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory 64c is increased, and the number of opening times is set to be large) is also set. Therefore, in the probable gaming state, it becomes easy to enter the second winning opening 64b, and by winning the second winning opening 64b to the player, the frequency of paying out the winning ball is increased. Decrease in holding ball is suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the probability variation gaming state while suppressing the consumption of the possession ball, and can obtain more jackpots in the probability variation gaming state, thereby further accumulating the game balls obtained during the jackpot gaming.

  Here, the “special symbol probability change gaming state (high probability state)” means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, special symbol It is a game state that is easily shifted to the game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is referred to as a “normal game state of a special symbol (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means that the normal symbol hit probability is increased, and the electric accessory 64c provided along with the second winning port 64b is used to play the game ball. This means that the state is easily changed to the state of guiding to the second winning port 64b (reverse C-shape (see FIG. 2)), and the ball easily enters the second winning port 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  Instead of increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b and the number of times the electric accessory 64c is released per one normal symbol are changed. Also good. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to distribute the ball that has entered the specific entrance 650a to either the probability variation rotator 900 or the continuous rotation body 901. The configuration is not limited to the allocation prize winning device 650 that allows a ball to enter the jackpot. For example, the allocation prize winning device 650 is configured to be opened even if it is not a jackpot, and in addition to the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901, a configuration is provided in which a pitch entrance that triggers a lottery for special symbols is provided. Also good. In this case, the entrance may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different award balls and probability variation ratios that can be obtained when a big hit is obtained). For example, you may comprise so that the entrance provided in the arrangement | positioning of the probability change rotation body 900 may become more advantageous. Moreover, as a timing which the allocation prize-winning apparatus 650 is open | released, it is good also as a structure opened, for example, when it becomes a normal symbol hit. In this case, in one normal symbol hit, the opening pattern in which the specific entrance 650a is opened only during the period in which the rotation distribution member 800 is inclined to the right side, and the rotation distribution member 800 is on the left side. It is good also as a structure which provides the open pattern in which the specific entrance 650a is open | released only in the period of the state which inclines to. That is, as the time-short state (and the probability variation state), a time-short state in which a lottery can be executed at an advantageous entrance and a time-short state in which a lottery can be executed at a relatively disadvantageous entrance are provided. Also good.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to focus attention on the entrance to which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 650 enters, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are variably displayed by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in association with a ball entering the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b (starting winning) is being executed. The special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, or the ball is entered into the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls) among the remaining balls, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is put is suspended up to four times, The number of balls to be retained is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Even when the player enters the second winning port 64b, the number of balls to be retained is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, it is configured that the balls entered into the first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (a high probability state of a special symbol) with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. And normal symbols, etc.). Further, the LED 37a indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64a (start winning prize), the first symbol display device 37 performs a variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) using that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is not performed at the same time, but only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are stored, the variation of the special symbol 2 is set with priority.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a secondary display area Ds for displaying the number of balls held.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64a. Ds3 is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the corresponding sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, the reserved ball of the second winning port 64b is set in the same manner using a reserved ball number symbol (for example, a symbol) different from the first winning port 64a.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, and ends the variation. As a later stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b operates for a predetermined time. As a result, the ball is easily put into the second winning opening 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal winning hole 67 is not limited to four times, like the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b, and is not more than three times, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64a and a second winning port 64b through which a ball can enter are disposed. When a ball enters the first winning port 64a, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first winning port switch. A special symbol 1 is drawn at 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly, when the ball enters the second winning port 64b, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning port switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws the special symbol 2 and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters. Further, as will be described in detail later, the number of winning balls, which is the number of balls won in the switch reading process (S101) of the main controller 110 due to the ON of the first winning port switch or the second winning port switch, The number of acquired balls, which is the number of balls paid out as a winning ball, is stored in a winning detection information area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  A variable winning device 165 is provided at the upper right of the first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b. In the open state of the variable winning device 165, the game ball that is launched so that the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (the game ball that is launched by right-handed hitting) is disposed at a position where it is easy to win. . Specifically, the variable prize-winning device 165 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing door that covers the specific entrance 165a and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. ). The normal entrance 165a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific entrance 165a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the state. As described above, this variable winning device 165 is set to the open state when the ninth to sixteenth rounds are executed during the big hit game.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific entrance 165a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time, A gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball enters the specific entrance 165a when the specific entrance 165a is opened May be formed as a special gaming state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  In addition, the game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are matched with the timing of entering the first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b. Are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b. Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 9B) is composed of a first per-random number table for a low probability and a first per-random number table for a high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are jackpots is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is low and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is high are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability time. (See FIG. 9B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-9” is the first random number table 202a (FIG. 9 (b) for high probability. ))). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9C). In the present embodiment, the value “0 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the jackpot A, and the jackpot A is always selected when the jackpot is reached.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9C) is only one type of jackpot A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types are selected. You may comprise. Further, the types and ratios of jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the main controller 110. The ROM 202 is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C). And at least a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) is set. Although not shown in the drawing, a variation pattern table in the short-time gaming state is set in addition to this.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and obtains it from the out (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. Based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the game state is a probability variation game state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the aforementioned variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value matches the random number value set in the second hit random number table (see FIG. 10D), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (d), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first winning opening 64a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first winning port 64a is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first winning opening 64a is opened “twice × 1 second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and furthermore, the release period of the first winning port 64a. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, the ball easily enters the first winning port 64a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first winning port 64a is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 22), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 held ball counter 203e, normal symbol held ball counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 203i, winning detection period storage area 203j, gate timing counter 203k, round start flag 203m, round counter 203n, round continuation flag 203p, probability variation flag 203r, and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas stores values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting win, the original special symbol jackpot lottery and Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state is always predicted in the prefetch determination. This is because, in this embodiment, whether or not a game ball that has won the distribution winning device 650 during the jackpot game enters the probability change port 900a (whether or not a game ball is detected by a probability change switch (not shown)). Since it is determined whether or not the probability change game state is set after the jackpot game, it is difficult to correctly predict the game state at the start of the variation of the special symbol for the winning game ball when winning the game ball. It is. Note that the game is in the probability variation game, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is equal to or more than the retained ball at the time of winning (including the number of pending balls that have already been won and held before winning), and the variation starts first. When there is no jackpot in the hold, the prefetching may be executed by the jackpot determination in the probability variation gaming state.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning port 64b (special symbol 2), and the first winning port 64a (special symbol 1) with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described above. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the winning (start winning) to the first winning opening 64a. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to an initial value of zero. Every time a ball enters the first winning opening 64a and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 13).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 13 and S505 in FIG. 16). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the first winning port 64a (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning port 64b (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S510 in FIG. 16, and is subtracted by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 13). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 13 and S511 in FIG. 16). reference).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to an initial value of zero, and is incremented by one up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 18).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 19). S803: No).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to zero, and the main controller 110 closes the specific entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific entrance 650a at the final round of jackpot ( That is, 100 is set when a probability change flag 203r, which will be described later, is turned on at the jackpot end timing, that is, when a game ball enters the probability change port 900a and is detected by a probability change switch (not shown). Is done.

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 14, S208) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 14, S208), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. Is done.

  The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, the jackpot game in which the allocation winning device 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process (FIG. 24, S1105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Is executed.

  The winning detection period storage area 203j counts a period of time when it is determined that the game ball is valid when a probability change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown) of the distribution winning device 650 in the jackpot game is detected. Storage area. When the jackpot game of “Big Jack A” is started, a counter value of 3750 (corresponding to 15 seconds) is set at the start of the round from the first round to the eighth round. At the end of the round, the counter value of 1250 (corresponding to 5 seconds) is reset. Here, at the end of the round, even if the value in the winning detection period storage area 203j is greater than 0, that is, the detection period remains, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is forcibly reset. Is done. Accordingly, when it is determined that five game balls as the closing condition have won the second specific entrance 650a before 15 seconds which is the maximum opening period of the second specific entrance 650a, the interval time A count value corresponding to 5 seconds is set.

  Thereby, even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed, a winning detection period longer than the interval time is set, and the probability change switch (not shown) and the continuation switch (not shown) are crossed over the rounds. It is possible to suppress problems that are detected as valid.

  In the present embodiment, when the second specific entrance 650a is in the closed state, a value corresponding to the same time as the interval time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) is stored in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Since it is set, in this case, it is possible to effectively detect a game ball entering the probability variation port 900a or the continuation port 901a. In the present embodiment, the count value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j in the closed state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific entrance 650a is configured. A counter value corresponding to a period obtained by adding 5 seconds to the period required for the game ball that entered the ball to reach the right channel port 655a or the left channel port 654a is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is effective when a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a at the end of the round is detected by a probability change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown). Can do. It should be noted that this period may be set to a period required until a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is detected by a probability change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown). .

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, when an effective period of 5 seconds is set at the end of the round and the period has elapsed, the probability varying rotator 900 or the continuous rotator 901 is quickly rotated in the direction opposite to the normal direction. Thus, the held game ball may be discharged to the discharge flow path 656. This configuration reduces the chance that a game ball that has entered at the end of the round will be judged invalid even though it is detected by a probability change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown). be able to. Further, the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901 may be configured to rotate in the opposite directions based on the round end timing, and may be configured to prevent detection by the probability variation switch or the continuation switch. .

  When the ninth to sixteenth rounds are executed, a value of 7500 corresponding to the round period (30 seconds) is set at the start of the round. In this case, 0 is set at the end of the round. Thereby, the end of the round can be determined by the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j.

  The winning detection period storage area 203j is updated by being subtracted by 1 in S1402 in the winning detection process (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The gate time counter 203k is a counter for discriminating the period of rotation of the rotation distribution member 800. This gate time counter 203k is incremented by 1 by the process of S1201 of the gate control process (FIG. 23, S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, when the value of the gate time counter 203k reaches a value of 1250 corresponding to 5 seconds, the rotation distribution member 800 is rotated and the game ball is guided to the right channel 655 or the left channel 654. Can be switched. When the value of the gate time counter 203k reaches 1250, it is reset to 0, which is the initial value.

  The round start flag 203m is a flag indicating that it is time to start a round during the jackpot game. When the round start flag 203m is on, it is determined that it is time to start a round. The round start flag 203m is turned on in S219 in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and in S1427 in the winning detection end process (FIG. 26, S1413). Here, it is set to ON when it is determined that there is a newly started round. It is set off at the start of the round.

  The round counter 203n is a counter indicating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. This round counter 203n is set to 8 at the start of jackpot A (S219 in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110). Here, 8 which is the minimum number of rounds is set. Further, when it is determined that the ball has entered the continuation port 901a in the distribution winning device 650 and has been detected by a continuation switch (not shown) (winning detection processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 25, S1302)). 8 is added to the value of the round counter 203n in S1406. Thereby, it is set so that the jackpot game is executed up to 16 rounds.

  The round continuation flag 203p indicates that a game ball enters the continuation port 901a during a big hit game (from the first round to the eighth round), is detected by a continuation switch (not shown), and the number of rounds is It is a flag indicating that it has been added. The round continuation flag 203p is set to ON in S1405 in the winning detection process (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Also, it is set to OFF in S1424 (at the end of the jackpot game) in the winning detection end process (FIG. 26, S1413).

  The probability variation flag 203r is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the probability variation port 900a during one big hit game (from the first round to the eighth round) and has been detected by a probability variation switch (not shown). It is. The probability variation flag 203r is set to ON in S1410 in the winning detection process (FIG. 25, S1302) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Also, it is set to OFF in S1425 (at the end of the jackpot game) in the winning detection end process (FIG. 26, S1413).

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. As for this ROM 202, as shown in FIG. 9A, a first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B), a first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C), a second per random number At least a table 202c (see FIG. 9D) and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) are provided. Since each table has already been described, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific entrance 165a. A large opening opening solenoid for opening and closing the shaft as a shaft, a solenoid for sliding the slide member 670 of the sorting prize winning device 650, a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64c, and the like are connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various switches 208 include sensors (not shown) for detecting winning balls.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and variation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a. The variation pattern selection table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time and variation) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. More detailed variation contents are determined from the type (reach, miss, etc.). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a power-off flag 223y, and others. At least a memory area 223z is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1 and the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 2). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes an area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. It is stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64a, or in main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 29). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 held ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has the maximum number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110 at the maximum. It is a counter that counts up to once. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a special symbol that is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81, when the number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning opening 64b. 2 is different only in that it is used for displaying the number of reserved balls of 2 and the others are the same, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 29), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 29), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 33). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. The power-off process is set and executed (S1616 in FIG. 28). When the power-off flag 223y is on in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 27), the RAM work area is cleared and the data is read, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S1510 in FIG. 27). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process by the data reading process in the startup process at the time of power restoration, and the navigation game is continuously executed. be able to.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and notice effect. Since the display control device 114 has a known configuration, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. In this switch reading process (S101), for example, in order to calculate the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the jackpot game according to the number of game balls won in the sort prize box 650a, the distribution prize device 650 is given. The state of the magnetic sensor 659 provided is detected.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 and FIG.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), the other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the change in the special symbol 2) Display suspension number N2) is acquired (S203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a variable sphere holding ball in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. If it is determined (S204: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (S209: No), it is determined that there is no fluctuating display holding ball in the special symbol, and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205). ), A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is determined to be 0 (S204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is determined to be greater than 0. (S209: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 described above is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If S has not passed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 14 or a special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 2 variation start process or the special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thus, the stop symbol of special symbol 2 or special symbol 1 is set.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S218), the round counter 203n is set to 8 and the round start flag 203m is turned on ( S219). Then, a jackpot start command is set (S220), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset (S221), and the process proceeds to S222.

  The jackpot game process is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later by the jackpot flag 203i set to ON in the process of S218. A specific description will be given in a jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) described later.

  Further, in the process of S219, the round counter 203n is set to 8 and the round start flag 203m is set to ON, so that it is set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later. A special game of rounds (8 rounds) according to the value obtained will be executed. Although details will be described later, when the round counter 203n is set to 8 by the process of S219, a special game of 8 rounds is executed, and the winning is detected by the winning detection process (FIG. 25) during the execution of the special game. If it is determined, 8 is additionally set in the round counter 203n (S1406), and a special game of 8 rounds (16 rounds in total) is executed.

  The jackpot start command set in the process of S220 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201. Among these, it transmits toward the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. Thereby, the display which suggests a big hit start is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, and it can make a player recognize that it changed to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S223), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S223: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S223: No), the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222 executed after the process of S221, S223, or S224, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set to synchronize the variable stop (S222). When the process of S222 is finished, this process is finished.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 of the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Each value is acquired (S301). Next, in order to determine whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S301 is a big win of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S302). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter 203g is greater than zero.

  When it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), a lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a is acquired (S303). ), The process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S303). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “10-399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 9B). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is not on (S302: No), a lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a is acquired ( S304) and the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability in the first random number table 202a (FIG. 9B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S304). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “1 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 9B).

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 or S304 is a jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (S305: Yes), the jackpot Is set (S306). In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the jackpot symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. The stop type to be displayed is determined. For example, “outgoing reach”, “completely out”, etc. are defined as the stop type.

  Next, in the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the display mode set in the process of S306. The jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S307). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0-50”, the normal reach is in the range of “51-179”, the super reach is in the range of “51-179”, and the special reach is in the range of “180-198”. A variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out (S305: No), a display mode of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. The stop type to be displayed is determined. For example, “outgoing reach”, “completely out”, etc. are defined as the stop type.

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d or the fluctuation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability change) 202d3 (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 22). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, the same process as the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is performed for the special symbol 1. Data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol 1 is acquired by the processing of S401, and thereafter, the same processing as the processing in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208) is performed on the special symbol 1. The specific contents are the same as the processing in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning opening 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (start winning prize) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  If there is no winning at the first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are acquired, and the special It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second prize opening 64b (S507). If it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when winning the first winning opening 64a.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S510), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type counter C3 are acquired, stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (S512), and the process proceeds to S513.

  If there is no winning at the second winning opening 64b (S507: No), or even if there is a winning at the second winning opening 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not less than 4. (S509: No), the process proceeds to S513.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the prefetching processing in S513 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S513). This prefetch process (S513) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 16).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b (S601: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b (S601: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table for low probability (S602). Then, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S603), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the jackpot game of jackpot A, when the game ball passes through a probability change switch (not shown) in the probability change flow path port 900k, a probability change game state is set. In the case of this probable gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the high probability big hit decision value in the first random number table 202a. Here, at the time when the pre-reading process is executed, it can be determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A, but in the jackpot game, the game ball passes through a probability variation switch (not shown) in the probability variation channel port 900k. It cannot be determined whether or not. That is, at the time when the prefetch process is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not the game state is likely to change.

  Therefore, when determining the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit in the prefetching process (S507), the determination value for the low probability in the first random number table is used regardless of whether or not the probability variation gaming state is entered. I am going to use it. In the present embodiment, as described above, the first hit random number table 202a is defined such that the jackpot determination value for low probability includes the jackpot determination value for low probability. Specifically, the jackpot determination value for high probability is “0 to 9”, and the jackpot determination value for low probability is “0”. As a result, regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through a probability variation switch (not shown) in the probability variation channel port 900k and enters the probability variation gaming state, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is the big hit at the low probability. A value of “0”, which is a determination value, can be determined to be a big hit.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 12), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the motor associated with the second winning opening 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning port 64b is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S708). Whether or not the time is short is determined by whether or not the probability change is being performed (whether or not the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0). In the present embodiment, the short-time gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state are configured to be set simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a short-time gaming state may be provided separately from the probability-changing gaming state.

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the time is short (the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S709). ). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In this embodiment, the special symbol lottery is configured so that it is difficult to win a normal symbol lottery during a special symbol jackpot. This is because the player hits a ball to win the special entrance 165a when the special symbol is a big hit (that is, during the special game state). In this case, when the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened, a ball to be awarded to the specific winning opening 165a is likely to enter the second winning opening 64b. It becomes difficult to win the specific entrance 165a. Therefore, during the big hit of the special symbol, the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning port 64b is made difficult to be opened, and the game ball is made easy to win the specific winning port 165a. In addition, since the specific winning opening 165a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64a during the special symbol jackpot, Many spheres enter the mouth 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9D).

  In the process of S708, when the time is not short (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the processing of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9D).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S712: Yes) The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S714). If the time is short (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S715). If the result of determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning port 64b as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 64c are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second winning port 64b Is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the time is not short (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning port 64b is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S719). If the time is short (S719: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S720), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is not short (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 64b. It becomes a state.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, initial operations of the sorting motor 270a, the first rotating motor 270b, and the second rotating motor 270c are set (S1020). In this initial operation, each motor is rotated in a predetermined direction, the operation is stopped at the origin position (a position where the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor), and each step counter is set to 0. Is done. Here, the origin position of the rotation distribution member 800 is a position for guiding the game ball to the right channel 655 (solid line position in FIG. 3A), and the probability variation rotator 900 has a probability variation port 900a with a probability variation channel. The continuous rotation body 901 is at a position facing the continuous flow path 901k (at a position facing the continuous flow path 901k (FIG. 3A). (Position rotated 180 degrees from the position shown). The interruption is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  In this way, the initial position (origin position) of the probability variation rotator 900, the continuous rotator 901, and the rotation sorting member 800 is set by the start-up process (see FIG. 21). Each position of the rotation distribution member 800 can be accurately determined from the step counter. In this way, by determining each position and notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the position by a command, the sound lamp control device 113 can set an effect for notifying the player of each position. it can. Specifically, it is informed in which flow path the rotation distribution member 800 is in a state in which the game ball is guided, and it is determined whether the game ball can enter the probability changing port 900a and the continuation port 901a. An effect to notify can be performed. Thereby, the player can expect the game ball to enter the probability changing port 900a and the continuation port 901a due to the effect during the jackpot game, or can aim the game ball to enter.

  In addition, this effect is to notify the player when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 executes a predetermined lottery and wins, or sets a plurality of jackpot types and reports whether or not the jackpot type is notified. It may be set so as to be variable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1109 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 12) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) or the start winning process (see FIG. 16) or the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 17). Send to. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the jackpot start command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) and the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and the gate control process is executed (S1104). Details of the processing of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific ball opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 165 is executed (S1105). In the jackpot control process, the specific entrance 165a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific entrance 165a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specified entrance 165a. To do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific entrance 165a is closed. The specific entrance 165a is repeatedly opened and closed for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific entrance 165a in the final round, the jackpot end is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the processing of S1105 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  When the process of S1106 is completed, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14), a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) is completed, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) or the process of S721, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 18), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18). (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1110). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the main process this time (S1110: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1111 and S1112).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1112).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1109 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and the first variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1109, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 20 has been executed, the power-off process after S1113 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1114). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1115), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1109 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1108, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the gate control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this gate control processing (S1104). This gate control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol big hit state, the position of the rotary sorting member 800 is switched to change the sort. This is a process for distributing the game balls that have entered the entrance 650a to the left channel 654 or the right channel 655.

  In the gate control process, first, 1 is added to the gate time counter 203k (S1201). Next, it is determined whether or not the gate time counter 203k is greater than 1250 (S1202). When it is determined that the gate time counter 203k is greater than 1250 (S1202: Yes), the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is switched by driving the accessory motor 270a (S1203), and the gate time counter 203k is changed. It is initialized to 0 (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  Here, since the gate control process is repeatedly executed every 4 ms in the main process, the position of the sorting member can be switched every time the value of the gate time counter 203k becomes 1250 (that is, every 5 s). it can. Further, the position of the rotation distribution member 800 is determined by a position (position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3A) or a right flow path 655 in which the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance ball opening 650a are distributed to the left flow path 654. It is switched by the accessory motor 270a so as to be either one of the positions to be distributed (the position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 3A).

  When the processing of S1202 or S1205 is finished, first rotation data is set (S1206), and second rotation data is set (S1207). Thereafter, a rotating body command is set (S1208), and this process is terminated.

  The driving of the first rotary motor 270b is controlled by the first rotation data set in the process of S1206. For example, in the case of a big hit, the rotation speed of the first rotary motor 270b may be changed according to the big hit type. As a result, a change occurs in the rotation operation of the continuous rotating body 901, and the interest of the player can be improved compared to a monotonous gaming machine in which the continuous rotating body 901 rotates at a constant speed. Further, if the rotation operation of the continuous rotation body 901 is set to be slow, it is possible to make it easy for the player to play with the aim of continuous winning, and the rotation operation of the continuous rotation body 901 is set to be fast. By doing so, it is possible to make a gaming machine that can draw lots of continuous winnings in a short time, that is, can perform lots of lottery of continuous winnings in one round.

  In addition, the rotation speeds of the rotary motors (270b and 270c) set in the processes of S1206 and S1207 may be changed at a predetermined timing, for example, a high rotation speed every hour from the time of power-on. Alternatively, a slow rotation speed may be set alternately. Further, the first rotation data and the second rotation data may be data of a plurality of rotation speeds and switching timing thereof. For example, the half rotation may be a high rotation speed, and the remaining half rotation may be a low rotation speed. Thereby, it can be set so that the half rotation in which each winning opening (900a, 901a) of each rotating body (900, 901) is the upper half is a slow rotation speed, and the remaining half rotation is a high rotation speed. As a result, it is possible to make adjustments so that each winning opening (900a, 901a) can be won easily, and if it is adjusted so that it is not so, it is possible to make adjustment difficult to win.

  The second rotation data set in the process of S1207 is different from the process of S1206 in that it controls the driving of the second rotary motor 270c and adjusts the rotation operation of the probability variation rotator 900, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the above-described processing of S1206 and S1207, the rotational speeds of the respective rotary motors (270b, 270c) may be set to be different or may be set to be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the gate control process is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), or it is determined whether the jackpot game is being executed, You may make it perform a gate control process only during execution of a jackpot game.

  The rotator command set by the process of S1208 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the reception of the rotator command, the sound lamp controller 113 sets a sound effect and transmits the display rotator command to the display controller 114. As a result, sound effects and displays in accordance with the operations of the accessory motor 270a, the first rotary motor 270b, and the second rotary motor 270c set based on the gate control process (S1104) can be output. .

  Specifically, the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is a position at which the game balls that have entered the distribution ball opening 650a of the distribution winning device 650 are distributed to the left channel 654, and the continuous rotating body 901 The continuation port 901a is at a position where the game ball is easy to enter (upward position), that is, the timing at which the game ball that has entered the distribution ball port 650a with a high probability becomes a continuous prize is calculated. A rotator command for notifying timing is generated. Thereby, at the timing at which it is easy to continue winning a prize, a sound effect for notification is output and an effect display is displayed (see FIG. 36A). This timing is calculated from the operation timing of the rotation distribution member 800 based on the gate time counter 203k and the rotation speed of the continuous rotating body 901 based on the first rotation data set by the processing of S1206. Further, as described above, the position of the continuous rotating body 901 is calculated by an origin sensor that is a photosensor (not shown).

  Similarly, for the probability variation prize, the position of the rotary sorting member 800 is a position at which the game balls that have entered the sorting entrance ball port 650a of the sorting prize winning device 650 are distributed to the right channel 655, and When the continuation port 900a of the probability variation rotator 900 is at a position where the game ball is easy to enter (a position in the upward direction), an effect display is displayed for notification (see FIG. 36B). This timing is calculated from the operation timing of the rotation distribution member 800 based on the gate time counter 203k and the rotation speed of the probability variation rotator 900 based on the second rotation data set by the processing of S1207. Further, as described above, the position of the probability variation rotator 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photosensor (not shown).

  Thereby, it can be set as the gaming machine in which the player can easily determine the timing for winning the game ball into the sorting ball entrance 650a of the sorting and winning device 650.

  In this embodiment, the determination value of the gate time counter 203k is 1250 (a value at which the switching timing is 5 seconds), but it may be a smaller value or a larger value.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1105). This jackpot control process (S1105) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the specific entrance This is a process for opening or closing 165a or the second specific entrance 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1105). In the process of S1105, if the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203i is on in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), the special symbol is being jackpoted, and a winning detection process is executed (S1302). This winning detection process (S1302) is a process of performing processing in accordance with the winning of the continuous winning or the probability-changing winning or the end of the winning detection period in the winning detection period provided in each round in the jackpot game. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1302 is completed, it is determined whether the round start flag 203m is on (S1303). If the round start flag 203m is on (S1303: Yes), it is the start timing of a new round, so the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is released according to the number of newly started rounds. The winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of rounds to be newly started (S1304).

  Specifically, as described above, in the 1-8 round jackpot game, the second specific entrance 650a is opened so that the allocation lottery is executed, and in the 9-16 round jackpot game, the allocation is performed. The lottery is not executed and the specific entrance 165a is opened.

  In addition, the round start flag 203m is set to ON because the closing condition for the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309), and the winning detection period based on the number of completed rounds ends. This is the case (see S1427 in FIG. 26). Here, the winning detection period set when the closing condition of the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied is 5 seconds in rounds 1 to 8 (1250 is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j). In the 9th to 16th rounds, 3 seconds (750 is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j), so in the 1st to 8th rounds, the interval time until the start of the next round is 5 seconds. In rounds 9-16, the interval time is 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the interval time and the winning detection period are made the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning detection period may be longer than the interval time. The winning detection period may be shorter than the interval time.

  Here, in the 9-16 round jackpot game, the specific entrance 165a is opened and the second specific entrance 650a is not opened, so there is no need to detect a continuous winning or a probable change winning. Further, in this case, when a continuous winning or a probable change winning is detected, there is a possibility that a game ball has been won illegally. be able to. Furthermore, in the 9-16 round jackpot game, it is not necessary to detect a continuous winning or a probable winning, so the winning detection period storage area 203j is set to 0 so that each winning is not detected. Also good. In this case, in order to measure the elapsed opening time of the specific entrance (65a, 650a), a separate timer or counter may be provided, and the closing condition may be determined based on the timer or counter.

  In the present embodiment, the processing is set as described above in the processing of S1304 and S1305. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific entrance 165a may be opened or opened in rounds 1 to 8. The interval may be set to 3 seconds or 10 seconds, the winning detection period storage area 203j may be set to 2000 or 7500, and the second specific entrance 650a is similarly opened in rounds 9 to 16 as well. Alternatively, the set value of the interval or winning detection period storage area 203j may be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of rounds may be divided into 1 to 3 rounds and 4 to 16 rounds, different settings may be used for each round, or the same settings may be used for all rounds.

  Thereafter, the round start flag 203m is turned off (S1306), and the round counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S1307). Here, when the round counter 203n set at the time of the jackpot start becomes 0 by subtracting 1 from the round counter 203n (when eight rounds are finished), in the winning detection end process (see FIG. 26) described later, You can execute the settings at the end. Further, the round counter 203n is incremented by 8 in the process of S1406 when there is a continuous winning in the winning detection process (see FIG. 25), which will be described later. In this case, the round counter 203n becomes 16 rounds. When the game ends, the 16-round jackpot game can be executed.

  When the process of S1307 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round start flag 203m is off in the process of S1303 (S1303: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed after opening the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a (when the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j becomes 0), or the specific entrance When a predetermined number of balls have won after opening the mouth 165a or the second specific entrance 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. Here, in the processing of S1303, as described above, if the jackpot game is 1 to 8 rounds, 15 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 3750 becomes 0), or It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when five game balls win the second specific entrance 650a. On the other hand, in the case of 9 to 16 rounds, when 30 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 7500 becomes 0), or when 10 game balls have won the specific entrance 165a It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. This embodiment is set in this way, but is not limited to this. Rounds 1 to 8 may be 30 seconds, 9 to 16 rounds may be 15 seconds, and 1 to 8 rounds may be 10 balls. , 9-16 rounds may be at the time of winning five balls. In addition, how to divide rounds is not limited to this, and may be defined as 1 to 2 rounds and 3 to 16 rounds, or different closing conditions may be used for each round, or the same closing may be used for all rounds. It is good also as conditions.

  In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition for the second specific entrance 650a is not satisfied (S1309: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition for the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309: Yes), the second specific entrance 650a is closed (S1310), and the round ended this time. Based on the number, the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset (S1311), and the process is terminated.

  Specifically, the process of S1309 resets the winning detection period storage area 203j to 1250 at the end of 1st to 8th rounds, and resets the winning detection period storage area 203j to 750 at the end of 9th to 16th rounds. It is to set. This is because in the 1st to 8th rounds, the second specific entrance 650a is opened, and at the end of the 1st to 8th rounds, game balls may remain inside the sorting prize winning device 650. is there.

  Here, since the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset based on the establishment of the closing condition (S1309: Yes), even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed by the processing of S1310, In some cases, the game balls remaining inside the sorting and winning device 650 (such as the sorting ball port 650a, the left channel 654, or the right channel 655) pass through the continuous channel port 901k or the probability variation channel port 900k. In this case, by resetting the winning detection period storage area 203j to 1250, it is possible to detect a winning based on the passage of each channel port for 5 seconds after the closing condition is established. As a result, the game balls remaining inside the sorting and winning device 650 (such as the sorting ball port 650a, the left channel 654 or the right channel 655) have entered the continuous channel port 901k or the probability variation channel port 900k. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress a problem that a continuous winning or a winning prize is not achieved.

  Also, in the 9th to 16th rounds, the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset, so that it is possible to detect that the second specific entrance 650a has been won illegally.

  Note that the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j set here may be changed as appropriate depending on the configuration of the distribution winning device 650. For example, until the left flow path 654 and the right flow path 655 of the allocation prize winning device 650 are long, and a game ball that has entered the allocation entrance ball opening 650a enters either the continuous flow path opening 901k or the probability variation winning prize opening 900k. If it takes about 10 seconds at the longest, it may be set to be 10 seconds, or it may be set so that the winning after 5 seconds is not regarded as a winning as it is 5 seconds.

  In addition, it may be configured to determine whether there is a game ball remaining in the distribution winning device 650 and to end the winning detection period when it is determined that there is no game ball. For example, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entry ball port 650a of the distribution prize device 650 after the closing condition is established, and the number of game balls that have passed through the continuous flow channel port 901k, the probability variation flow channel port 900k, and the discharge port 657 are as follows. If they match, it may be determined that there is no game ball remaining inside the sorting and winning device 650. As a result, when there is no game ball remaining in the distribution winning device 650, the winning detection period can be ended, so that it is difficult to illegally make continuous winnings or probable winnings. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance ball port 650a is determined by the use of the magnetic sensor 659. The game balls that have entered the probability variation channel port 900k can be detected using a probability variation switch (not illustrated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the winning detection process (S1302) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the winning detection end process (S1105). This winning detection process (S1302) is a process executed when a jackpot game is being executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 24), and whether or not there is a winning game ball in the allocation winning device 650. It is a process for detecting.

  In the winning detection process (S1302), first, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401). If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1401: No), this processing is terminated as it is a period in which winning detection is unnecessary due to an interval between rounds or the like. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the winning detection period storage area 203j is greater than 0 (S1401: Yes), the winning detection period storage area 203j is decremented by 1 (S1402), and the process proceeds to S1403. Here, since the winning detection process (S1302) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed every 4 ms, the winning detection period storage area 203j is decremented by 1. Is every 4 ms. As described above, the winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of rounds to be newly started in the processing of S1305 of the jackpot control processing (S1105). If the number of rounds is 1 to 8, 3750 is set. Therefore, the opening time of the second specific entrance 650a for 1 to 8 rounds is 15 seconds. If the number of rounds is 9 to 16, 7500 is set, so the opening time of the specific entrance 165a for 9 to 16 rounds is 30 seconds.

  When the processing of S1402 is completed, it is determined whether or not the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403). When the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403: Yes), since the process based on the continuous winning (S1405 to S1407) has already been executed, the process of S1404 to S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408. Transition.

  On the other hand, if the round continuation flag 203p is not on (is off) (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a continuous winning (S1404). Here, the continuous winning is when the game ball enters the continuous flow path port 901k. When the game ball enters the continuous flow path port 901k, the passage of the game ball is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). Based on the detection by the switch reading process (S101) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is stored as winning detection information. In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous winning based on the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101).

  In the process of S1404, if there is no continuous winning (S1404: No), the process of S1405 to S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if there is a continuous winning (S1404: Yes), the round continuation flag 203p is set to ON as a process based on the continuous winning (S1405), and 8 is added to the round counter 203n (S1406). ), A continuous winning command is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  With the round continuation flag 203p set by the process of S1405, as described above, the processes of the process based on the continuous winning (S1405 to S1407) can be prevented from being executed repeatedly. Further, the round counter 203n added by the process of S1406 can execute the jackpot game up to 16 rounds based on the game ball entering the continuous flow channel port 901k. Further, the continuous winning command set by the processing of S1407 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this continuous winning command, it sets a continuous winning sound and transmits a continuous winning command for display to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the continuous winning command for display, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 a display indicating that the winning is continued. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the game has been continuously won based on the winning sound and the display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the game ball entering the continuous channel port 901k.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203r is on (S1408). If it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the probability variation flag 203r is on (S1408: Yes), the processing based on the probability variation winning (S1410 to S1411) has already been executed as in the processing of S1403. , S1409 to S1411 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the probability variation flag is not on (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a probability variation prize (S1409). The probability variation winning is determined in the same manner as whether or not there has been a continuous winning in the processing of S1404 described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S1409 that there has not been a probability change prize, the processes of S1410 and S1411 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1412. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1409 that there is a probability variation prize, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S1410), a probability variation prize command is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412). If it is determined that the winning detection period storage area 203j is not 0 by the process of S1412 (S1412: No), the process of S1413 is skipped and the present process is terminated because it is not the timing to end the winning detection.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412: Yes), the winning detection end process is executed because it is the timing to end the winning detection (S1413). This process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the winning detection end process (S1413) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the winning detection end process (S1413). This winning detection end process (S1413) is a process executed when the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 and the winning detection end timing is reached in the above-described winning detection process (see FIG. 25).

  In the winning detection end process (S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the round counter 203n is 0 (S1420). In the process of S1420, when it is determined that the round counter is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1420: No), since the round executed in the jackpot game still remains, the round start flag 203m is set. It is set to ON (S1427), and this process ends.

  With the round start flag 203m set here, as described above, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24), the processes (S1304 to S1308) related to the start of the round are executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1420, if it is determined that the round counter 203n is 0, it is the end timing of the jackpot game, so it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203r is ON (S1421). If there is, the probability variation counter is set to 100 (S1422), and if not on, the process of S1422 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1423.

  As described above, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON when a game ball enters the probability variation channel port 900k in the distribution winning device 650. Thus, the probability variation gaming state can be set for 100 times based on the entrance of the game ball into the probability variation flow path port 900k. In this embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is given 100 times. However, the probability variation gaming state is not limited to this, and the probability variation gaming state may be set until the next big hit.

  In the processing of S1423, end of jackpot is set (S1423), round continuation flag 203p, probability variation flag 203r and jackpot flag 203i are set to OFF (S1424, S1425), and a jackpot end command is set based on the number of rounds. (S1426), this process ends.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, an initial setting process associated with power-on is first executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1616 (see FIG. 28) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 28), it executes a power-off process in S1616. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1616 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1616 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1616, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1616, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1506). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 28). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on reaches the process of the current startup. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1509), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1511).

  Next, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511), the interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1508 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the processes of S1504 to S1506. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), the process from S1509 to S1510, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1511, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511). The interrupt permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1509 is that if the process from S1504 to S1506 is reached via the process in S1506, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601). If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes in S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variation display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1602). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1608 described later are set (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on the reserved lamp is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period such as a period when the variation effect is not executed, the expected value of jackpot due to the current variation can be obtained by pressing the frame button 22 when the notice character appears at the start of the variable display. Or a button for selecting a reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. It is also good.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the lamp editing process in S1608 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. After executing the process of S1610, the process proceeds to S1611.

  In the process of S1611, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1612 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1613 (S1613: Yes), both the power shutdown flag 223y and the power shutdown processing flag are turned on (S1615), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1616). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1617), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Here, for the detailed description of each process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the details of the command determination process (S1611) are described first for convenience. The variable display setting process (S1612) will be described in order.

  Next, a command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination processing (S1611) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1611), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1701). When the variation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1702), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). When the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (special The variable display hold count N1) in the symbol 1 or the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e (the variable display hold count N2 in the special symbol 2) is extracted, and this is extracted as the special symbol 1 hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113. The number is stored in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1708), and the process returns to the main process. In the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Every time it is detected or every time the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1708. Can be matched with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1708 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1707, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1709). When a winning information command is received (S1709: Yes), the lottery result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command, and the winning information storage area for the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is extracted. Store in the first area of 223a (S1710) and return to the main process. In the process of S1710, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  On the other hand, if a winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1709 (S1709: No), it is next determined whether or not a command related to jackpot has been received (S1711). If a command related to the jackpot is received (S1711: Yes), a process related to the jackpot corresponding to the received command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process.

  Examples of the jackpot command include a jackpot start command, a round number command, and a jackpot end command. Specifically, for example, when the received command is a jackpot start command, sound information at the time of jackpot start is set, and a display opening command is set. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts a jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at the time of a big hit start, the sound and display of the big hit effect can be output and notified to the player. Similar processing is executed for the round number command and the jackpot end command.

  In the process of S1711, when the command related to the jackpot is not received (S1711: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the accessory is received from the main control device 110 (S1713). If a command related to an accessory is received (S1713: Yes), an accessory-related process is executed (S1714), and the process returns to the main process. Details of this accessory-related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1713, when a command related to an accessory is not received (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not a continuous winning command is received from the main controller 110 (S1715). If the continuous winning command is received (S1715: Yes), the continuous winning process is executed (S1716), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the continuous winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1715, when the continuous winning command has not been received (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the probability-changing winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1717). If a probability variation winning command is received (S1717: Yes), a probability variation winning time process is executed (S1718), and the process returns to the main process. The details of the process for the probability variation winning prize will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1717, when the probability variation winning command is not received (S1717: No), the process according to the received other command is executed (S1719), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the accessory related process (S1714) which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this accessory-related process (S1714). This accessory-related process (S1714) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines a command related to the accessory received from the main controller 110. Execute the process according to the command.

  In the accessory-related process (S1714), it is first determined whether or not a switching command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1801). If a switching command is received (S1801: Yes), a switching sound is set (S1802), a display switching command is set (S1803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  The display switching command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display switching command, the display control device 114 displays a display suggesting switching on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance ball port 650a of the allocation prize winning device 650 are distributed to the left flow path 654, the rotational distribution member 800 is “left. Is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and distributed to the right flow path 655, the sound “Right is right” is output. In addition to the output, a message “probability variation lottery” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, the display is not limited to this, and display suggested in other modes (character, screen color, etc.) may be performed. Further, without displaying a display suggesting switching, a game ball that has entered the distribution entrance ball port 650a of the allocation prize winning device 650 is displayed between the left channel 654 and the right channel 655. You may make it impossible to recognize to which part the information is distributed.

  If the switching command has not been received in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether a rotating body command has been received (S1804). When a rotating body command is received (S1804: Yes), a sound effect is set based on the received rotating body command (S1805), a display rotating body command is set (S1806), and the process returns to the command determination process. .

  The display rotation body command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display switching command, the third symbol display device 81 performs display based on the display rotator command. Specifically, as described above, the timing set in the gate control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is notified of the timing at which it is easy to continuously win or the probability change winning is easy. Thereby, it can be set as the gaming machine in which the player can easily determine the timing for winning the game ball into the sorting ball entrance 650a of the sorting and winning device 650.

  On the other hand, if the rotating body command is not received in the processing of S1804 (S1804: No), the processing of S1805 and S1806 is skipped and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the continuous winning process (S1716), which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this continuous winning process (S1716). This continuous winning process (S1716) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process corresponding to the continuous winning command received from the main control device 110. Execute.

  In the continuous winning process (S1716), first, a continuous winning sound is set (S1901), and then a continuous winning command for display is set (S1902), and the process returns to the command determination process. The continuous winning command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning command, a display indicating that a continuous winning has occurred is executed (FIG. 37A). Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the continuous winning is achieved, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of continuous winning, the player is notified of the occurrence of continuous winning by sound and display by the processing of S1901 and S1902, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be notified only by display or only by display, or may not be notified. If the continuous winning is not notified, the player will determine whether or not the jackpot game will continue depending on whether or not the ninth round starts, so whether the player will continue the jackpot game until the ninth round. We will pay attention to whether or not. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the probability variation winning prize process (S1718), which is one process in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this probability variation winning process (S1718). This probability variation winning time process (S1718) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and a process corresponding to the probability variation prize command received from the main control device 110. Execute.

  In the probability variation winning process (S1718), first, a probability variation winning sound is set (S2001), a display probability variation winning command is set (S2002), and the process returns to the command determination process. The display probability change winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation winning command, a display indicating that a certain variation winning has occurred is executed (FIG. 37B). Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the continuous winning is achieved, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

  In the present embodiment, when a probability variation winning is achieved, the occurrence of the probability variation winning is notified to the player by sound and display by the processing of S2001 and S2002. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be notified only by display or only by display, or may not be notified. If the notification is not made, the player cannot determine whether or not the game is in the probability variation game state, so it is difficult to quit the game until 100 games that may be in the probability variation game state are completed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game for a long time.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process (S1612) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1612). This variable display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2106. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2102), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 to the execution area side is performed. . More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2106.

  In the processing of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2106: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2107), and then in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2108).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110.

  In the process of S2110, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2110). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration according to the first embodiment, whether the game ball is easily guided to the probability rotating body 900 or the game ball is easily guided to the continuous rotating body 901 depending on the start timing of the jackpot game. Is configured to be variable depending on the rotation position and rotation timing of the rotation distribution member 800. Therefore, it can be configured such that the degree of expectation for probability change and the degree of expectation for 16 round jackpots vary depending on the start timing of the jackpot game (timing for jackpot). Therefore, even when the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, the player can play the game with an interest in whether the probability change is given or 16 rounds are given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the allocation winning device 650 in which the eight-round jackpot game is executed in the 16 round lottery (continuous lottery) and the probability variation lottery is set to the open state. In addition, a 16-round jackpot is awarded, and the variable winning device 165 is set to an open state for the 9th and subsequent rounds. Therefore, from the 1st round to the 8th round, the game is performed by opening the sorting prize winning device 650, which makes it difficult to win the game ball than the variable prize winning device 165, so that the player can change the probability change port 900a and the continuation port 901a. It is possible to play a game by concentrating on what can be entered into the ball. In addition, since the variable winning device 165 in which a game ball can easily enter a game is played in the 9 to 16 rounds of the big hit game, the big hit game can be performed efficiently.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to rotate every 5 seconds, the player decides whether to aim at the probable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 and to play the game. Can also be done. Therefore, it is possible to decide which of the five balls that can be entered into the second specific entrance 650a is to be used for lottery of probability change or continuation (16 rounds of big hit).

  In this embodiment, the opening period of the second specific entrance 650a from 1 round to 8 rounds is 15 seconds. However, by setting the opening period to 5 seconds, the rotator that can be targeted in 1 round is limited, and the round starts. Or, the privilege that can be given to the player can be varied according to the start timing of the jackpot game.

  Further, by repeating the opening state and the closing state of the second specific entrance 650a in one round in a short time (for example, 1 second), the player can change the probability of the rotation body 900 and the continuous rotation body 901. It may be configured such that it is difficult to intentionally aim at either one.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the game balls that have entered the second specific entrance 650a enter either the probability-variant rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 by the rotating distribution member 800. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the first embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the probability variation opening 900a of the probability variation rotator 900, the game ball is guided to the continuous rotator 901. It differs from 1st Embodiment by the point comprised so that. In addition, about the structure same as 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a view showing the game board 13 in a first modification of the first embodiment. The first modification of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the distribution winning device 650 is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the structure of the allocation prize-winning apparatus 650 in the 1st modification of this 1st Embodiment is demonstrated.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of the distribution winning device 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. The distribution prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 3A) in the first embodiment is a flow path wall portion so that a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is guided to the probability variation rotator 900. 653 is formed, and a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in a flow path directly downward from the sorting entrance ball port 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting entrance ball port 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 650.

  Further, the configuration is such that when the game ball that has entered the rotation entrances 900b to 900d of the probability variation rotator 900 is discharged to the discharge channel 662, the discharge channel 662 is guided to the continuous rotator 901. Is different. The description of the same configuration is omitted.

  The game balls that have entered the second specific entrance 650a are all guided to the probability variation rotator 900, and when the prize is entered in the probability variation aperture 900a, the probability variation rotator 900 rotates rightward to the probability variation flow passage port 900k. To be guided. Thereafter, the probability variation flag 203r is turned on by detection by a probability variation switch (not shown). As in the first embodiment, since up to five balls are entered in the second specific entrance 650a in one round, the probability changes when entering the second specific entrance 650a continuously. The structure is such that a game ball can easily enter the mouth 900a. In the first modification of the first embodiment, from the first round to the eighth round, the maximum opening time of the second specific entrance 650a is set to 5 seconds, and the second specific entrance The period during which a game ball can enter the mouth 650a is short. Since 100 game balls are fired by the launch device in one minute, the number of game balls is 1.6 in one second, and about eight game balls can be fired in five seconds. Therefore, it is difficult for five game balls to enter the second specific entrance 650a in consideration of distribution by game nails.

  In addition, since a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the probability variation opening 900a is guided to the continuous rotation body 901, when a game ball enters the probability variation opening 900a, the game ball guided to the continuous rotation body 901 is displayed. It will be less. Therefore, the lottery for determining whether or not to enter the continuation port 901a is configured to have a lower probability than the lottery for determining whether or not to enter the probability variation port 900a.

  With this configuration, the player first enjoys the lottery whether or not to enter the probability variation opening 900a, and then whether the game ball that has not entered the probability variation opening 900a enters the continuation opening 901a. You can enjoy a lottery of no. Therefore, the maximum player can enjoy a two-stage lottery. In addition, by first guiding the game ball to the probability variation rotator 900, the probability variation lottery can be executed with priority over the continuous lottery, and the probability variation can be easily given.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation rotator 900 is arranged upstream of the continuous rotator 901. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the continuous rotator 901 may be arranged upstream of the probability variation rotator 900. In addition, although the number of entrances per round to the second specific entrance 650a is five, it is not limited to this, and it may be composed of one less ball or the like or more than ten balls. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is configured to distribute the ball that has entered the specific entrance 650a to either the probability variation rotator 900 or the continuous rotation body 901. The configuration is not limited to the allocation prize winning device 650 that allows a ball to enter the jackpot. For example, the allocation prize winning device 650 is configured to be opened even if it is not a jackpot, and in addition to the probability variation port 900a of the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuation port 901a of the continuous rotator 901, a special symbol lottery is triggered. It is good also as a structure which provides a ball entrance. In this case, the entrance may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different award balls and probability variation ratios that can be obtained when a big hit is obtained). For example, you may comprise so that the entrance hole (namely, entrance entrance of a downstream side) provided in arrangement | positioning of the continuation opening | mouth 901 may become more advantageous. Moreover, as a timing which the allocation prize-winning apparatus 650 is open | released, it is good also as a structure opened, for example, when it becomes a normal symbol hit. In this case, in one normal symbol hit, the opening pattern in which the slide member 670 is opened during the period in which it is possible to enter the entrance hole arranged at the position of the probability variation opening 900a and the position of the probability variation opening 900a. An open pattern in which the slide member 670 is opened only during a period in which it is impossible to enter the ball (a state in which it is possible to enter the ball at the downstream entrance) may be provided. That is, as the time-short state (and the probability variation state), a time-short state in which a lottery can be executed at an advantageous entrance and a time-short state in which a lottery can be executed at a relatively disadvantageous entrance are provided. Also good.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to focus attention on the entrance to which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 650 enters, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Note that effects and controls similar to those in the first embodiment are also executed in the first modification of the first embodiment, but the detailed description thereof is the same as described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second modification of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the configuration of the allocation prize winning device 650 in the first embodiment is changed in that the configuration of the allocation prize winning device 650 is changed ( This is different from FIG. The allocation prize winning device 650 according to the second modification of the first embodiment is a protrusion for holding the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a below the slide member 670 with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the member 700 is provided. The projecting portion 700 has a state in which a solenoid (not shown) is actuated so as to project forward during the round so that a game ball entering the second specific entrance 650a cannot flow downward. Become. After that, at the end of the round, the slide member 670 is slid forward, and at the same time, the protruding member 700 is also changed to the back side, and the held game ball is caused to flow downstream. In addition, a detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided on the upper portion of the protrusion 700, and by detecting the sensor, a prize ball is paid out, and the round ends. Executed. Further, when the game ball is held by the protruding portion 700, even if the second specific ball entrance 650a is in an open state, it is prevented from entering the second specific ball entrance 650a by the held game ball. Then, it flows down the upper part of the front cover body 652 and flows down to the lower part of the sorting prize winning device 650.

  In addition, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path directly downward from the sorting entrance ball port 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting entrance ball port 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 650, as in the above-described embodiment.

  Here, in the second modification, as in the first embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is switched and rotated every 5 seconds. Further, the probability variation rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901 are similarly rotated. The interval period from 1 round to 8 rounds is set to 8 seconds. The maximum time required for the game ball held on the protrusion to be detected by the probability change switch or the continuation switch is 7 seconds. In the present modification, the winning detection period storage area 203j is configured to set a period of up to 7 seconds at the end of the round. Specifically, when the round starts, the maximum round period of 15 seconds is set, and when one game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a (in the modified example, the maximum number of winnings in one round is 1 ball) A period of 7 seconds is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j.

  With this configuration, when a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is detected by a probability change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown) during a round game, it is effective. Can be determined. Therefore, it can be enjoyed whether the player wins the probability variation opening 900a or the continuation opening 901a.

  Further, depending on the timing of completion of the round, whether it is guided to the right channel 655 or the left channel 654 varies depending on the rotation position of the rotating distribution member 800, and changes the expectation of probability change or continuation (16 rounds). it can.

  In the present embodiment, the protruding portion 700 is changed to the back side at the round end timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing after 0.5 seconds from the end of the round or a plurality of times can be selected by lottery. You may comprise so that it may change after time. With this configuration, the player can be determined by the timing at which the holding by the protrusion 700 is released, the rotational position of the rotation distributing member 800, the rotational position of the probability-variable rotating body 900, and the rotational position of the continuous rotating body 901. Different interests can be given.

  In the second modification, the number of balls entering the second specific entrance 650a is 1 in one round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific entrance 650a is opened for 3 seconds in one round. It may be configured to open and allow one game ball to enter, close for 8 seconds, let the game ball flow down and draw, and then open again for 3 seconds to enter and close the game ball. . By comprising in this way, a plurality of game balls can be entered in one round and can be drawn a plurality of times, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Third Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (b) is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution winning device 650 according to the third modification of the first embodiment. In the third modification of the first embodiment, in contrast to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a, the game ball is prevented from flowing down to the probability variation rotator 900. The difference is that a protruding portion 700 is provided. This protrusion is variable by a solenoid (not shown) so as to protrude to the front side during rounds 1 to 8. When a game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown). In this modification, from 1 round to 8 rounds, the maximum opening period of the second specific entrance 650a in 1 round is set to 3 seconds, and the sliding member is at the timing when 3 game balls enter. 670 is changed to the closed position. Here, in a state in which the game balls are held on the protruding portion 700, the size is configured such that a maximum of 4 balls can enter the second specific entrance 650a. Therefore, if 3 more balls enter the second specific entrance 650a at the timing when three balls enter the second specific entrance 650a, up to 4 balls enter the second specific entrance 650a in one round. It is configured to be a ball.

  In addition, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path directly downward from the sorting entrance ball port 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting entrance ball port 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 650, as in the above-described embodiment.

  The projecting member 700 is changed to the back side 1 second after the end of one round, and the game ball flows down to the probability variation rotator 900. Here, if four game balls have entered the second specific entrance 650a, it will definitely enter the probability variation port 900a, and it is determined that the player is surely given a certain variation. After that, three game balls are guided to the continuous rotating body 901 and can be made to enter the continuous port 901a with a probability of 3/4. In this modification, the maximum period until the game ball held in the protrusion 700 is detected by the continuation switch (not shown) in the interval period from 1 round to 8 rounds (in this embodiment, 10 rounds). Second) is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j as the winning detection period.

  In addition, a command indicating the number of game balls that have entered the second specific entrance 650a is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and an effect based on the command is executed. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which a display mode indicating that it is determined that a certain change is given at the timing when the fourth ball enters the ball is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Second Embodiment
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 58, as a second embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 39 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the game board 13 according to the second embodiment includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310). , Other not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first left winning port 64a, first right winning port 64b, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device ( (Not shown), a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the left first winning port 64a, the right first winning port 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are obtained by processing the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 10) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. . Specifically, when the ball has won the left first winning opening 64a, the first symbol display device 37A is operated, while when the ball has won the right first winning opening 64b, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, “jackpot B (16R probability variation lottery with jackpot)” and “jackpot C (16R probability variation no jackpot)” are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “big hit B” is a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. During the big hit game, the probability change switch 65e3 is controlled so that a game ball can pass through, and a positive change gaming state is given after the big hit game. It is a set jackpot. On the other hand, the “big hit C” is a big hit game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and it is difficult for a game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game. Therefore, the jackpot C is a jackpot to which a short-time gaming state is given mainly after the jackpot game.

  In addition, the “probability game state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the left first winning opening 64a or a state of a game in which a ball is easy to win a prize to the right first winning opening 64b. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time for opening the electric accessories 645a, 645b attached to the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b is changed. A longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the electric winnings 645a and 645b are in the opened state (opened state), the left first prize opening 64a is compared with the case where the electric winninges 645a and 645b are in the closed state (closed state). Or it will be in the state where it is easy to win a ball to right 1st prize opening 64b. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, and the number of times that the big win lottery is performed can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the time shortage, the opening time of the electric accessory 645a, 645b attached to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b is not changed, or the opening time is changed. In addition to this, it is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times that the electric utility items 645a and 645b are opened per one time than in the normal case. In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time when the electric winnings 645a and 645b associated with the first left winning port 64a and the first right winning port 64b are opened and 1 It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that the electrically-driven goods 645a and 645b open | release at the time of a round. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric winnings 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b, or the electric winnings 645a, 645b per one time. The number of times of opening may not be changed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) at the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. Consists of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67. And a second symbol display device (not shown). The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 10). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”). The electric components 645a and 645b thus made are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric winnings 645a and 645b of the first left winning port 64a or the first right winning port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win a prize to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b during the probability change and the time saving.

  It is also possible to increase the winning probability during probability change or time reduction, and increase the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric utility items 645a, 645b per hit, etc. When it is in a state where the ball is likely to win the mouth 64a or the first right winning opening 64b, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric parts 645a and 645b may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Under the variable display device unit 80, a distribution winning opening 64 is disposed. Here, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 4, the details of the distribution winning opening 64 will be described. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are front views of the distribution winning opening 64 with the front cover body 64c removed, and FIG. 41 (a) shows the game board in the left-right direction above the distribution winning opening 64. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected 13 and was seen from upper direction. FIG. 41B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line IVb in FIG.

  The distribution winning opening 64 is inserted into the opening processed by the router on the game board 13 and is fixed to the game board 13 from the front side with screws. As shown in FIG. 41 (a), a front cover body configured to be detachable is disposed on the front side of the distribution winning opening 64. The front cover body 64c is provided with locking pieces 64d and 64e on the left and right sides, and claw portions protruding outward are formed at the tips of the locking pieces 64d and 64e. By engaging the front cover body 64c from the front side of the distribution winning opening 64, the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d and 64e and the engaging walls 64g and 64h of the base body 641 of the distribution winning opening 64 are engaged. As a result, the front cover body 64c is fixed to the distribution winning opening 64. Further, when the front cover body 64c is pulled forward, the engagement between the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d and 64e and the engagement walls 64g and 64h is released, and the front cover body 64c can be separated from the prize winning opening 64. it can.

  The front cover body 64c is made of a transparent resin, and has a spiral pattern on the front surface. With this pattern, the inside of the sorting prize winning opening 64 appears to be distorted through the front cover body 64c, making it difficult to visually recognize.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the base body 641 for fixing the distribution winning opening 64 to the game board 13 is formed with an opening 64i into which one game ball can be inserted. The entrance hole through which the game ball entered from the portion 64i can flow down is the left first winning port 64a on the left side and the right first winning port 64b on the right side connecting the inner wall portions, and the connecting portion 64j. Is formed. The connecting portion 64j is formed in a convex shape protruding upward, and is configured to restrict the game ball from moving to the other entrance.

  Each of the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b is configured to have an inclined surface that receives a game ball entered from the opening 64i and flows down to the back side of the game board 13. . On the back side of the game board 13, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), a left flow down rod member 64t and a right flow down rod member 64u are respectively arranged. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the left descending basket 64 t is arranged so that the game ball that has entered the first left winning port 64 a flows down below the game board 13 on the back side of the game board 13. . A detection switch 64s1 capable of detecting a game ball is provided on the left downstream basket 64t, and it is detected that a game ball has entered the first left winning port 64a.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the right downhill 64u flows down below the game board 13 when the game ball that has entered the right first winning port 64b flows down to the back side of the game board 13. Are arranged to be. A detection switch 64s2 capable of detecting a game ball is provided on the right downstream basket 64u, and it is detected that a game ball has entered the right first winning port 64b.

  With reference to FIGS. 40A and 40B, the distribution adjustment of the distribution winning device 64 will be described. FIG. 40A is a diagram showing a state in which game balls are set to be easily distributed to the left first winning port 64a, and FIG. 40B is a diagram in which game balls are easily allocated to the right first winning port 64b. It is the figure which showed the set state.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (b), at the upper part of the opening 64i formed in the base body 641 of the sorting and winning device 64c, the game nails are arranged with a width that allows one game ball to pass to the left and right. Thus, a passage port 645 is formed. The passage port 645 has a passage formed around the apex of the connecting portion 64j. Among the game nails forming the passage opening 645, an adjustment nail that adjusts the ratio of the adjustment nails t1 and t2 closest to the base body 641 to distribute the game balls to the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b Is set to As shown in FIG. 40 (a), by adjusting the game nail t2 to be inclined downward, the width of the opening w2 is narrowed in the right first winning port 64b, and a game ball is placed in the left first winning port 64a. It is set so that it can be easily distributed. Here, if the width of the opening w2 is adjusted to be narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, the game ball can be distributed only to the first left winning port 64a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the proportion of the game balls distributed to the right first winning port 64b by tilting the game nail t1 downward to narrow the width of the opening w1 of the left first winning port 64a. Many can be set. Further, by adjusting the width of the opening w1 to be narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, the game ball can be adjusted to be distributed only to the right first winning port 64b.

  Here, in the state where the front cover body 64c is attached to the sorting and winning device 64, as shown in FIG. 41B, the front cover body 64 covers the adjustment nails t1 and t2 from the front side. The nail adjustment is difficult to identify. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the distribution adjustment of the distribution winning device 64. Further, the surface of the front cover body 64c that faces the adjustment nails t1 and t2 is formed in a recessed shape, and is configured to prevent interference.

  In the passage port 645, the electric combination items 645a and 645b are arranged. When the electric combination items 645a and 645b are operated and the blades are opened to the outside, the game balls are guided to the passage port 645. Easy to configure.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can play a game so that the player can recognize the passing port 645 formed in the upper portion of the sorting and winning device 64 as the ball entrance and enter the game ball. Further, when a game ball enters the first left winning port 64a, one prize ball is paid out to the player. In addition, when a game ball enters the right first winning port 64b, three prize balls are set to be paid out to the player (see FIG. 46B). Therefore, the game store side can variably adjust the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by changing the ratio of the game balls to be distributed to the left first prize opening 64a and the right first prize opening 64b. Therefore, by adjusting the adjustment nails t1 and t2, the game shop side can easily adjust profits and the like. In this case, the profit can be adjusted without changing the rate of entry to the passing port 645, and the player can be made to play with the setting that the game balls are inserted into the distribution winning port 64 more.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b, a special symbol lottery is executed, and a variation display of the third symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the third symbol display device. This is executed at 81. Therefore, the player can play the game with the special symbol lottery opportunity maintained. Therefore, the interest of the player can be increased.

  When a ball wins the left first winning port 64a, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the ON of the first winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 10), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a right first winning port 64b through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the left first winning port 64a in front view. When a ball enters the right first winning port 64b, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at 110 (see FIG. 10), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In the present embodiment, the balls are distributed to either the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b by the adjustment nails t1 and t2 provided in the distribution winning device 64. It is not limited. For example, instead of the adjustment nails t1 and t2, a winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like may be switched. In other words, one of the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other non-closed winning port. Further, in this case, the switching valve may be configured to be able to set a winning opening that is closed by a hall, may be switched randomly, or may be configured so that a winning opening that is closed at a predetermined interval is switched. Also good. Alternatively, it may be configured to switch with a predetermined operation pattern every time a normal symbol is hit. Specifically, for example, when the left first winning port 64a with a small amount of prize balls to be paid out in normal times is opened (the right first winning port 64b is closed by a switching valve) and a normal symbol is hit, A configuration in which a right first winning port 64b is opened (a left first winning port 64a is closed by a switching valve) during a period (for example, a period longer than the opening of the electric components 645a and 645b). It is good. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which a switching valve performs a fixed operation | movement every time it hits a normal symbol. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be opened for a certain period (for example, 1.5 seconds) after winning, and the right first winning opening is set after 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds. 64b may be set to an open state, and after 4.5 seconds, the left first winning port 64a may be set to an open state again. And it is good also as a structure which provides a variation in the open pattern (type of a time-short state) of the electrically-driven accessory 645a, 645b in the case of a normal symbol hit. That is, when the left first winning port 64a is open, the electric powers 645a and 645b are opened in the short time state (short time state 1) and the right first winning port 64b is open during the open period. It is good also as a structure which provides the short time state (short time state 2) of the pattern in which the accessory 645a, 645b is opened.

  Further, instead of providing the first left winning port 64a and the first right winning port 64b, different lotteries are executed (for example, different jackpot types are determined when a big hit is made). It is good also as a structure to provide. And you may comprise so that the winning opening which can enter a ball can be switched. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a winning opening with a large number of winning balls is easily determined and a winning opening with a large number of winning balls is easily determined. By adopting a configuration in which a winning opening having a different advantage degree when a lottery is executed is provided, it is possible to play a game with strong expectation that a ball will win an advantageous winning opening. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, what is provided in the distribution winning device 64 is not limited to a winning opening. For example, each winning opening is provided in a different part on the game board, and a plurality of operating openings for switching whether each winning opening is in a state where a ball can enter or cannot enter a ball. It is good also as a structure which provides (what is called a non-electrical accessory). And it is good also as a structure switched by a nail, a switching valve, etc. which ball is made to enter into which operation port (it is switched to the state which can enter a winning port).

  A first variable winning device 65 is arranged at the lower left of the game board 13, and the jackpot lottery performed due to winning at the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b is a big win. Then, a predetermined dynamic display is executed in the first symbol display device 37A, the first symbol display device 37B, or the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) in which a ball is likely to win the first variable winning device 65. As this special gaming state, the first variable winning device 65 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first variable winning device 65 is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the first variable winning device 65 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, the details of the first variable winning device 65 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 42, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude to the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, so that the first variable A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an open / close for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 65e and the flow A switching member 65h that projects into the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and a rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side, and is attached to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is comprised with the cover body 65m for fixation for fixing.

  FIG. 43A is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 in the La cross section (see FIG. 43B). 43 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 43 (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 43B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 43 (b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an incomplete entry. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves toward the second winning port 65 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including the probability change game). The time and effort to change the game method to left-handed immediately can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 43A is a La-La cross-sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  44 (a) and 44 (b), a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later. .

  FIG. 44A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged obliquely to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is done.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning slot 65 during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can do. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. Yes. The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the 13th round. In addition, when the jackpot C is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, the jackpot B is configured such that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but the jackpot C cannot be configured to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem of winning in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the winning game is won in the 13th round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged and the jackpot C.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, for one ball prize). 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed from the first embodiment described above, and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. This is different from the point that is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment.

  The ROM 202 in this embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that the content of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed and the content of the prize ball table 202e is added. Are the same.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 46A) is set so that the big hit B and the big hit C can be selected. Specifically, the value “0-29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the big hit B decision value, and “30-99” is set as the big hit C decision value.

  Here, as described above, the “big hit B” is configured such that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not the probability change state is entered). However, the “big hit C” is configured so that it cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, the lottery for determining whether or not the probability change state is entered). "Big jackpot B" is more advantageous to the player than "Big jackpot B".

  Next, the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 46B), the game balls enter each of the above-mentioned prize winning holes (the general prize winning port 63, the first left winning port 64a, the first right winning port 64b, and the specific winning port 65a). In this case, the table defines the number of game balls to be paid out. The prize ball table 202e is referred to in order to calculate the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out, based on the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 48). Based on the number of prize balls calculated here, a prize ball command is generated and transmitted to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. When the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 receives this prize ball command, the payout motor 216 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls according to the received command.

  Specifically, 1 is defined as the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a, and 3 as the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the right first winning port 64b. 10 balls are specified as the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the specific winning port 640, and 5 balls are specified as the payout ball when the game ball enters the normal winning port 63 ing. Thus, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the game ball enters the right first winning port 64b is set to be larger than the left first winning port 64a. Thereby, it is advantageous for the player if a lot of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b, while it is disadvantageous for the player otherwise.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjustment nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 entering the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, respectively. It has been. Thereby, it can be adjusted whether the game ball which passed the passage port 645 wins many to the 1st right winning port 64b, and it can be adjusted whether it is advantageous for a player.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the RAM 203 in this embodiment includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. , Counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203r, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passage counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, operation counter 203t3, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5, probability variation valid flag 203t6, probability variation It has at least a valid timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, an hour / medium counter 203u, an opening flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the left first winning opening Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning at 64a or the right first winning port 64b is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, and the acquired data is Among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a winning (start winning) at the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, and the number of held balls in variable display increases. Every time, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S204 in FIG. 17).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 17 and S505 in FIG. 20). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal start port 67. ) Is counted up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 22).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 23). : No).

  The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for holding each counter value, as in the first embodiment described above.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the jackpot setting process (S233), which is executed when the jackpot is set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) (S2503 in FIG. 51), and is executed at the end of the jackpot. Is set to off in the ending process (FIG. 55) to be performed (S2702 in FIG. 55).

  The probability change flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a probability change gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates a low probability gaming state (including a short-time gaming state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203s, which will be described later, is set to ON when the jackpot game ends (see S2704 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 44A) during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812 in FIG. 56). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203r is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203s is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. The configuration may be such that 203s is officially set to ON and the process returns. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203t1 described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability variation setting flag 203s and turning the power on again in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing the damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203t1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in this embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203t1 and a discharge number counter 203t8 described later. The probability variation passage counter 203t1 is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S2811 in FIG. 56). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S2911 in FIG. 57). The probability variation passage counter 203t1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203t2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 42) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (FIG. 56). S2803). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning (the value of the winning number counter 203t2) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203t8 and the probability variation passing counter 203t1) are awarded to the first variable winning device 65. Is determined to match, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203t2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203t3 is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the big hit B, the flow solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the big hit C, the flow solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the big hit B, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 13 rounds in the jackpot B, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit C (S2602 in FIG. 54). On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S2809 of the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203t3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203t3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 which is an initial value in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203t3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203t5, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S2905 in FIG. 57). The remaining ball timer 203t5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203t5 discharges the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the elapse of time. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203t5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203t5 has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. (S2907 in FIG. 57). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, the impact is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, and the jackpot C Even if it exists, it is possible to suppress the injustice to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203s is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203t6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 44A) is switched based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203t7 is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203t6 described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203t7, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if it passes the probability variation switch 65e3 thereafter, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  As a result, in a state in which the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 by entering the special discharge flow path 65e2, or a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3. Thus, it is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203t8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 44A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203t8 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S2911 in FIG. 57).

  The hour / medium counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the hour / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203u is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this embodiment, when the probability change gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the game mode is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  The opening flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. The opening flag 203v is set to ON in the jackpot setting process (FIG. 51), which is executed when the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) is a big hit, the jackpot control process 2 When the opening command is set in FIG. 53, it is set to OFF (S1332 in FIG. 53).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47B, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment in that the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is deleted. The difference is that the counter 223f is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The effect counter 223e is a counter used for a notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 48 to 57. Each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is a special symbol variation process (S104) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), compared to the first embodiment described above. Instead, the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49) is executed, and the gate control process (S1104) is not executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), instead of the jackpot control process (S1105). The difference is that the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process 2 is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interruption process 2, first, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, the information on entering the left first winning opening 64a and entering the right first winning opening 64b is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 2 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). . Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) in the first left winning port 64a or the first right winning port 64b (S105). In the start winning process (S105), only the process related to the special symbol 2 is not executed in the first embodiment, so that detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  When the process of S105 is completed, the processes of S106 to S109 are executed as in the first embodiment, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S231). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). ).

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). Details of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If S has not passed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S217) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, whether the big hit B or the big hit C is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit B is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit C is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), a jackpot setting process is executed (S233), and the process proceeds to S222. Details of the jackpot setting process (S233) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203u is greater than 0 (S234). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S234: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S234), and the process proceeds to S235. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203u is 0 (S234: No), the process of S235 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222 executed after the process of S233, S234, or S235, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set to synchronize the variable stop (S222). When the process of S222 is finished, this process is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process 2 (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213). The special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S213) in the second embodiment is different in that the process of S331 is executed instead of the process of S302 of the first embodiment, and the other points are the same. .

  Specifically, in the processing of S302 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is being performed by determining whether or not the probability variation counter 203g is greater than zero. On the other hand, in the process of S331 in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability change is being performed by determining whether or not the probability change flag 203r is on.

  In the process of S331, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203r is on (that is, if it is determined that the probability change is being performed) (S331: Yes), the process of S303 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. Execute this to finish this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S331 that the probability change flag 203r is off (that is, when it is determined that the probability change is not in progress) (S331: No), the process of S304 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. To finish this processing.

  Next, the jackpot setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process (S233). This jackpot setting process (S233) is a process that is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49) and performs setting for starting the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot setting process, first, the jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S2501), and the opening scenario of the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 65k is determined based on the determined jackpot type. Is set (S2502). More specifically, in the case of jackpot type A, the opening of the flow path solenoid (probability varying solenoid) 65k is set so that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the 13th round of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the case of big hit C, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set not to be opened (the game ball does not pass through the probability changing switch 65e3).

  Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S2503), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S2504), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. In the main process 2, main processes of the game are executed.

  In the main process 2, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device ( External output processing to be transmitted to the peripheral control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 48) is determined. If there is winning detection information, the payout control device is based on the winning ball table 202e. A prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to 111. Further, as in the first embodiment, the reserved ball number command, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command, and the like are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102), the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then the big win is obtained when the special symbol is in the big win state. The big hit control process 2 for opening or closing the execution of the effect and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S1105). Details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S1105 is completed, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric actors 645a and 645b associated with the passage port 645 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  When the process of S1106 is completed, the processes of S1107 to S1116 are executed and the present process is terminated as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1104). This jackpot control process 2 (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the identification This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process 2, it is first determined whether or not the opening flag 203v is on (S1331). In the process of S1331, when it is determined that the opening flag 203v is on (S1331: Yes), the opening flag 203v is turned off (S1332), an opening command is set (S1333), and this process ends. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1331, when the opening flag 203v is not on (S1331: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301). The jackpot flag 203i is turned on when the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. In the process of S1301, if the big hit flag 203i is not on (S1301: No), the special symbol is not being big hit, so this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1334). If it is determined in the process of S1334 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1334), a jackpot operation setting process (S1335), which is a process for setting a new round, is executed. End the process.

  Here, in the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 54, S1335), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2601). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S2601 (S2602). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2603). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize-winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1334 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1334: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1336). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1336: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1337). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1338). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1336 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1336: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1339). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball thrown time has elapsed. It is determined as When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1339: Yes), an ending process is executed (S1340). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the ending process (S1340) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 55, S1340). In the ending process (FIG. 55, S1340), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (S2701). Next, the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S2702), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is on (S2703: Yes), the probability variation flag 203r is set on (S2704). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203s is configured to be turned off based on the probability variation flag 203r being turned on. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203s is not on (S2703: No), the hour / middle counter is set to 100, and this process ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203s is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203r is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing the probability variation switch 65e3, and to set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

  In the present embodiment, the short-time gaming state is given 100 times when the probability-changing gaming state is not achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be given 50 times or 150 times. You may make it give a short-time game state 100 times with a game state.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1339, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1339: No), a winning process is executed (S1341). Now, with reference to FIG. 56, the winning process (S1341) will be described in detail. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1341).

  In the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S2801). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S2801: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S2802: Yes), the winning number counter 203t2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2803). Thereafter, the process of S2804 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S2802: No), the process of S2804 is executed.

  In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S2806). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON (S2807). Thereafter, the process of S2808 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2804 that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has elapsed (S2805). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2805: Yes), the processing of S2806 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2805: No), the processing of S2808 is executed.

  In the process of S2808, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203t3 is larger than 0 (S2808). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203t3 is greater than 0 (S2808: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203t3 is decreased by -1 and updated (S2809). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S2810). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S2810: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203t1 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2811). The probability variation setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812). Thereafter, the process of S2813 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S2810: No), the process of S2813 is executed. In the process of S2813, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2813). If it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S2814). The probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON (S2815). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2808, when it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2808: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816). If the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is off (S2816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2817). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S2818). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is the upper limit value (S2818: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203t6 is set to off (S2819), and the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is reset to the initial value 0 (S2820). . Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2818 that the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value (S2818: No), the processing of S2810 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of ball removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 56, S1341) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1342). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of the abnormality process (S1342) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S1342). In the abnormal process (S1342), a process of monitoring whether or not the game ball is illegally passed to the probability changing switch 65e3 is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 57, S1342), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S2901). If it is outside the round valid period (S2901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S2901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S2902: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S2903). Thereafter, the process of S2904 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S2902: No), the processing of S2904 is executed.

  In the process of S2904, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is off (S2904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203t5 is incremented by one and updated (S2905) because it is during the ball throwing time. The remaining ball timer 203t5 determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S2906). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S2906: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S2906: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203t1 and the discharge number counter 203t8) and the number of winning (value of the winning number counter 203t2) match. Is discriminated (S2907).

  If it is determined that they match (S2907: Yes), the process of S2909 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2907: No), an error command is set (S2908). Thereafter, the process of S2909 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, the game ball can be left in the first variable prize-winning device 65 in an unauthorized manner, so that even if the jackpot C, the game ball can be prevented from passing through the probability change switch 65e3.

  In the process of S2909, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to OFF (S2909), and the remaining ball timer 203t5 is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S2910). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203t2, the discharging number counter 203t8, and the probability variation passing counter 203t1 are reset to initial values (S2911), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, a command determination process 2 (S1611) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is changed to execute, and the other points are the same.

  With reference to FIG. 58, the command determination process 2 (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1611). This command determination process 2 (S1611) is executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. judge. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process 2, the processes from S1701 to S1708 are executed as in the first embodiment. If it is determined in step S1707 that a pending ball number command has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1731). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1732). Return to main processing 2. In the process of S1732, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area for the first special symbol is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S1731, if a winning information command has not been received (S1731: No), it is then determined whether or not a command relating to jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (S1711). Here, examples of commands related to jackpots include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command.

  If a command related to the jackpot is received in the processing of S1711, processing corresponding to the command is executed (S1712), and the processing returns to the main processing 2. Specifically, for example, when the received command is an opening command, a display opening command is set. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts a jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1711 that a command related to jackpot has not been received (S1711: No), it is determined whether an error command has been received (S1733). If it is determined in S1733 that an error command has been received, error processing corresponding to the command is executed (S1734), and the process returns to the main process 2.

  Specifically, the processing of S1734 extracts an error type from the received error command, and sets a display error command based on the error type. Thereby, the occurrence of the error can be notified to the display control device 114 together with the error type. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, when an error of winning number mismatch occurs in the main control device, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and notifies the display control device 114 of the error command (for example, a winning number mismatch error error). Character is displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress illegally leaving the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and allowing the game ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 even if the jackpot is C.

  If it is determined in S1734 that an error command has not been received (S1734: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed ( In step S1719, the process returns to the main process 2. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing in S1719 is performed according to the command, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and the command is used in the display control device 114. The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machines, the game shop side adjusts the profit by adjusting the winning rate of the entrance where the special symbol lottery is performed. In such a configuration, there is a problem that the lottery opportunities for special symbols are reduced, a period in which the special symbols are not changed, etc. occur, and the player's willingness to play is attenuated. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 enters either the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, so Done. The left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b are set with a prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 46B) so that the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball enters is different. ing. Specifically, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a is one, whereas the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the right first winning port 64b. Has three balls. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b, while it is disadvantageous for the player otherwise.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjustment nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 entering the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, respectively. It has been. Thereby, it can be adjusted whether the game ball which passed the passage port 645 wins many to the 1st right winning port 64b, and it can be adjusted whether it is advantageous for a player. Further, since the number of winning balls paid out to the player by the adjusting nails t1 and t2 (the number of winning balls with respect to the gaming balls that have passed through the passage opening 645) can be varied, the rate of entry through the passage opening 645 is adjusted. There is no need, and it is possible to easily configure the game balls to be awarded to the distribution winning device 64. Therefore, for the game store, even if it is set as a game ball that wins a lot in the sorting and winning device 64, it is possible to secure a profit by suppressing the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the player has more opportunities to draw a special symbol, and can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  Further, a front cover body 64c is provided on the front surfaces of the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b. The front cover body may be made of an opaque member, or a pattern may be provided on the front portion. It is also possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 has entered the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. good. As a result, when a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 have won the first left winning opening 64a, the player visually recognizes it and wins more to the left first winning opening 64a (that is, for the player). The feeling of dissatisfaction or the like can be reduced by feeling that the adjustment is made.

  Furthermore, you may comprise so that a player may become difficult to visually recognize the position of the adjustment nails t1 and t2 by comprising a front cover body with an opaque member or giving a pattern to a front part. As a result, the player visually recognizes the positions of the adjustment nails t1 and t2, and feels that the player has adjusted so as to win a lot in the first left winning opening 64a (that is, disadvantageous for the player). You can reduce feeling.

  Further, the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b may be calculated and displayed. Specifically, a game ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 is detected by a sensor or the like, and enters the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b until the passed game balls reach 100 balls. The number of game balls is memorized. Thereafter, when the number of game balls passed reaches 100, the number of stored game balls is displayed, and the stored information is cleared. Here, the above-described display indicating the entrance ratio may be displayed only when, for example, a switch is provided on the back side of the gaming machine and the switch is on. As a result, when adjusting the entrance ratio in the store, the entrance ratio is displayed and adjusted so that the entrance ratio can be easily adjusted and the player is turned off. This prevents the entrance ratio from being displayed and prevents the adjusted entrance ratio from being displayed.

  Note that the number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 is not detected, but only the number of game balls that have entered the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is detected. The above processing may be executed when there are 100 balls. Thereby, since the sensor of the passage port 645 can be made unnecessary, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Moreover, the calculation timing of the above-mentioned entrance ratio is not limited to every 100 balls, but may be every 300 balls, every 50 balls, or may be calculated every predetermined time.

  In addition, as described above, while the “ordinary symbol time-saving state” is continued, each time a new special symbol jackpot is reached, each time a short-term period (“ The regular symbol “short-time state” duration) is updated, so if the special symbol jackpot is newly added during the “normal symbol short-time state” duration, the normal symbol that was left before the new jackpot The short time period becomes invalid. For example, when “special symbol jackpot B” is reached and “normal symbol normal state” is changed to “normal symbol time-short state”, the state is that the special symbol lottery is 100 after the end of the “big jackpot B”. It will continue until the end. However, immediately after that, if the special symbol jackpot B is reached again, the short time period until then will be invalidated, and the “normal symbol normal state” will have 100 special symbol lottery after the end of the “big jackpot B”. It will continue until it ends.

  In addition, although the electric accessories 645a and 645b are arranged so as to make it easier to enter the game ball into the passage port 645, the present invention is not limited thereto, and only the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b receive game balls. You may comprise so that it may guide easily. In this case, the side wall forming the left first entrance 64a or the right first prize entrance 64b of the base body 64c is configured by rotating blades (electrical accessories), and the game ball is rotated by rotating. It is good also as a structure which makes it easy to enter into the left 1st entrance 64a or the right 1st entrance 64b. By adopting such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, it is possible to pay out a lot of game balls during a short time or a certain change, and the player's possession ball decreases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for shifting to the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the balls are distributed to either the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b by the adjustment nails t1 and t2 provided in the distribution winning device 64. It is not limited. For example, instead of the adjustment nails t1 and t2, a winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like may be switched. In other words, one of the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other non-closed winning port. Further, in this case, the switching valve may be configured to be able to set a winning opening that is closed by a hall, may be switched randomly, or may be configured so that a winning opening that is closed at a predetermined interval is switched. Also good. Alternatively, it may be configured to switch with a predetermined operation pattern every time a normal symbol is hit. Specifically, for example, when the left first winning port 64a with a small amount of prize balls to be paid out in normal times is opened (the right first winning port 64b is closed by a switching valve) and a normal symbol is hit, A configuration in which a right first winning port 64b is opened (a left first winning port 64a is closed by a switching valve) during a period (for example, a period longer than the opening of the electric components 645a and 645b). It is good. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which a switching valve performs a fixed operation | movement every time it hits a normal symbol. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be opened for a certain period (for example, 1.5 seconds) after winning, and the right first winning opening is set after 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds. 64b may be set to an open state, and after 4.5 seconds, the left first winning port 64a may be set to an open state again. And it is good also as a structure which provides a variation in the open pattern (type of a time-short state) of the electrically-driven accessory 645a, 645b in the case of a normal symbol hit. That is, when the left first winning port 64a is open, the electric powers 645a and 645b are opened in the short time state (short time state 1) and the right first winning port 64b is open during the open period. It is good also as a structure which provides the short time state (short time state 2) of the pattern in which the accessory 645a, 645b is opened.

  Further, instead of providing the first left winning port 64a and the first right winning port 64b, different lotteries are executed (for example, different jackpot types are determined when a big hit is made). It is good also as a structure to provide. And you may comprise so that the winning opening which can enter a ball can be switched. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a winning opening with a large number of winning balls is easily determined and a winning opening with a large number of winning balls is easily determined. By adopting a configuration in which a winning opening having a different advantage degree when a lottery is executed is provided, it is possible to play a game with strong expectation that a ball will win an advantageous winning opening. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, what is provided in the distribution winning device 64 is not limited to a winning opening. For example, each winning opening is provided in a different part on the game board, and a plurality of operating openings for switching whether each winning opening is in a state where a ball can enter or cannot enter a ball. It is good also as a structure which provides (what is called a non-electrical accessory). And it is good also as a structure switched by a nail, a switching valve, etc. which ball is made to enter into which operation port (it is switched to the state which can enter a winning port).

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 79. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, the passing ball 645 and the passed game ball enter either the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b having different payout ball numbers based on the winning ball. Sphere. A gaming machine has been described in which it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for a player by adjusting the pitch ratio with the adjusting nails t1 and t2.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the passing port 645 is provided in either the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640 having different payout balls expected in the case of a big hit. A gaming machine into which a game ball that has passed through will enter.

  Here, a lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the left first winning port 64a, and a second special symbol based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640. The lottery will be held. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are set so that the ratio of the jackpot type selected in the case of the jackpot is different. The jackpot based on the second special symbol is set such that a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is easier to select than the jackpot based on the first special symbol.

  Also, the number of payout balls based on winning is configured such that the number of second winning ports 640 is larger than that of the left first winning port 64a, as in the second embodiment. Thereby, in this 3rd Embodiment, compared with 2nd Embodiment, the adjustment of whether it becomes advantageous for a player can be adjusted more strongly.

  In the third embodiment, the reserved symbol indicating that the number of reserved balls is greater than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Thereby, for example, when adjusting not to enter any one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. The player will be dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls will not increase from 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls will be 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction. In the first embodiment described above, the reserved symbol indicating that the number of reserved balls is greater than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) may be displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  In the third embodiment, the second winning opening is replaced with the point that the display of the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed with respect to the second embodiment, and the right first winning opening 64b. The difference is that 640 is provided. Further, the difference is that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are changed. About another point, it is the same as 2nd Embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 59, the game board 13 is provided with a second winning port 640 instead of the right first winning port 64b. The second winning port 640 has the same structure as the right first winning port 64b in the second embodiment, but the lottery of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning ball to the second winning port 640. The selection ratio of the jackpot type is different between the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the expected value of the number of balls to be paid out to the player is different. Details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the display areas in the second embodiment described above, a small area Ds4 is provided at the upper right of the screen. The small area Ds4 displays identification information that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the number of reserved balls (see FIG. 60B), and is small until the number of held balls reaches a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment). A reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed only in the area Ds1, and when the number of reserved balls is increased from that, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls increased from the predetermined value is displayed that is difficult for the player to recognize. . Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is four or less, one reserved symbol is displayed for each one of the reserved balls in the small area Ds1, and “-” is displayed in the small area Ds4. The Thereby, the player can easily recognize how many balls are held by counting the number of held symbols.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is increased from four, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and the player recognizes the increased number of reserved balls in the small area Ds4. Difficult reserved symbols are displayed. Specifically, “A” is obtained when the number of retained balls is 1 (that is, the number of retained balls is 5), and the number of retained balls is 2 (that is, the number of retained balls is 6). In the case of “B”, the number of retained balls for the increment is 3 (ie, the number of retained balls is 7), “C”, and the number of the retained balls for the increment is 4 (ie, the number of retained balls is 8). In the case of a sphere), “D” is displayed. Thereby, since only the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 can be easily recognized, the player can be given an illusion that the maximum number of reserved balls is four. Thereby, for example, when adjusting not to enter any one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. The player will be dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls will not increase from 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls will be 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction.

  In the present embodiment, the small area Ds4 is a small display area compared to other display areas (for example, the small area Ds1). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the number of balls on hold based only on the holding symbol of the small area Ds1, which is a display area larger than the small area Ds4. Thereby, for example, when adjusting not to enter any one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. The player will be dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls will not increase from 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls will be 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction.

  The reserved symbols that are difficult for the player to recognize in the small area Ds4 are not limited to this, and may be displayed with other symbols and symbols.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, the display (change) timing of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds4 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to display a stop symbol indicating a continuous display that suggests that the variation effect is continuously executed when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment). Yes. As a result, the difference between the number of reserved balls recognized by the player and the actual number of reserved balls can be resolved without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  First, with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, a case where the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced will be described. FIG. 61 shows the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the small area Ds1 when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value during the period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced. It is a timing chart which showed the relation between a holding symbol and a holding symbol displayed on small field Ds4.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and “−” is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that a variation effect is being executed, and if a game ball newly enters the left first prize slot 64a or the second prize slot 640 during the changeable period of the stop pattern of the fluctuation effect, the suspension is held. The number of balls is 5. As a result, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “−” to “A”, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed is changed to one that suggests the continuation of the changing effect (see FIG. 62A). . As a result, when this variation effect is finished, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 62B). Then, the variation effect is started, and the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “A” to “−”, and the actual number of reserved balls becomes four (FIG. 62 (c)).

  Thereby, by displaying the stop display of the continuous display, the player can recognize that the variation effect is continuously executed and the next variation effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is 4 balls, but the actual number of reserved balls is 5, the actual held ball without making the player feel uncomfortable. By reducing the number from 5 balls to 4 balls, it is possible to start the variation effect.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. As described above, FIG. 62 (a) is an example of a display screen when a game ball newly enters the left first winning slot 64a or the second winning slot 640 during the changeable period of the change effect stop symbol. 62 (b) is an example of a display screen when a continuation display suggesting the continuation of the variation effect is displayed after FIG. 62 (a). FIG. 62 (c) FIG. 62 is an example of a display screen when a variation effect is executed after FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, a case where the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the variable period cannot be replaced will be described. FIG. 63 shows the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and its small area Ds1 when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value in the period in which the stop type of the variable period cannot be replaced. 5 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the reserved symbols and the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds4.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and “−” is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, assuming that a variation effect is being executed, and a game ball has newly entered the left first prize opening 64a or the second prize opening 640 during the non-replaceable period of the stop pattern of the fluctuation effect, The number of reserved balls is 5 balls. Thereby, in order to change the display of the small region Ds4 from “−” to “A” and to change the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next variation effect to the continuous display that suggests the continuation of the variation effect, Add 1 to the stop type change counter. Thereby, when the stop type of the next change effect of the change effect is received from the main control device 110, it is changed to continuous display, and the stop type change counter described above is decremented by one. As a result, in the next variation effect to be executed, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display suggesting that the variation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 64B). Then, the change effect is started, and the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “A” to “−”, and the actual number of reserved balls becomes four (FIG. 64C).

  As a result, even if the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is not replaceable, the change effect is continued by displaying the stop symbol of the continuous display of the stop symbol of the next change effect to be executed. It is executed and the player can be made aware that the next variation effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is 4 balls, but the actual number of reserved balls is 5, the actual held ball without making the player feel uncomfortable. By reducing the number from 5 balls to 4 balls, it is possible to start the variation effect.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202, and FIG. 65B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203.

  First, regarding the ROM 202, the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b and the prize ball table 202e are different, and the other points are the same. The difference in the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 65A and FIG. 66, and the difference in the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. To do. Note that the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c have the same contents as those in the second embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b is provided with a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 selection table 202b2.

  The special figure 1 selection table 202b1 is a table used for selecting a jackpot type when a big hit is made based on a ball entering the first left winning opening 64a, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is This is a table used to select a jackpot type when a jackpot is won based on a ball entered into the second winning opening 640. The special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 are defined with different ratios of jackpot types, and in the jackpot between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The expected value of the number of balls to be paid out is set to be different.

  Specifically, the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 can select a big hit B and a big hit C, respectively. The ratio is set to be different.

  Specifically, in the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, the value “0 to 29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and “30 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit C. (See FIG. 66 (a)). Further, in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, the value “0 to 69” of the first hit type counter C2 and the value “70 to 99” of the jackpot C determination value are set as the jackpot B determination value, respectively. (See FIG. 66 (b)).

  As described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is advantageous to the player because the “big hit B” is a big hit in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not it will change. Therefore, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is a more advantageous selection table for the player than the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, and is based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 rather than the left first winning port 64a. It is easy to select a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Similarly to the second embodiment, the number of payout balls based on the ball entered into the second winning port 640 is set to be larger than the left first winning port 64a. As a result, it can be adjusted so as to be more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player than the second embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the winning at the second winning opening 640 is configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning at the left first winning opening 64a is performed. The jackpot based on the may be configured such that a jackpot advantageous to the player is easily selected. Thus, in terms of the number of payout balls, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the first left winning opening 64a, and in the selection of the jackpot type, the first left winning is more than the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to enter the mouth 64a. Thereby, it can adjust so that it may not become too advantageous or too disadvantageous for a player.

  Next, the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the winning ball table 202e, the number of payout balls to be paid out is defined in accordance with the type of the winning winning opening. Specifically, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a is 1, and the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 is 3 balls. Yes, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the specific winning port 640 is 10, and the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the normal winning port 63 is 5. Thus, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the second winning port 640 from the left first winning port 64a is set to be increased. Thereby, it is advantageous for the player if a lot of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the second winning opening 640, while it is disadvantageous for the player otherwise.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjustment nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 into the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640, respectively. ing. Thereby, it is possible to adjust whether or not a lot of game balls that have passed through the passing port 645 win the second winning port 640, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is made based on the ball entered into the second winning opening 640, a big win that is advantageous to the player is easily selected as compared with the big win based on the first left winning opening 64a. Therefore, it can be adjusted so as to be more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player than the second embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the second winning port 640 is larger than the left first winning port 64a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second winning port 640 is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number of payout balls to be paid out when entering the first left winning port 64a may be increased. Thereby, in the selection of the jackpot type, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the left first winning opening 64a, but in the number of payout balls, the left winning position is more than the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to enter the 1 winning opening 64a. Thereby, it can adjust so that it may not become too advantageous or too disadvantageous for a player.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Compared with the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a variation execution flag 203w1, and a variation order storage area 203w2. Is different, and the other points are the same.

  As in the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol). The only difference is that the left first winning port 63a or the right first winning port 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning port 640 (second special symbol), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As in the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second winning port 640 (second special symbol). The left first winning port 63a or the right first winning port 63b (first special symbol) is different from the second winning port 640 (second special symbol) only in other points. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The change execution flag 203w1 is a flag for setting which storage area is to be executed based on the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c. This variation execution flag 203w1 is set based on data in the variation order storage area 203w2 described later in the variation execution determination processing (see FIG. 70), and is referred to in the processing of S252 and S253 in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 69). Is done. This flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is interrupted, and is set to execute fluctuation based on the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in the initial state where the RAM is cleared or the like.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of held data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c. In this variation order storage area 203w2, eight storage areas are set, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the second embodiment in that the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c, the stop type change counter 223g, and the stop type changed counter 223h. And the reserved symbol storage area 223i are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As with the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c outputs the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol from the main controller 110 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since it differs only in that it is stored based on the reserved ball number command, its detailed description is omitted.

  The stop type change counter 223g displays the stop display displayed in the next fluctuation when the sum of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than 4, It is a counter for discriminating whether or not to change to continuous display (see FIG. 62 (b)) suggesting continuous fluctuation. This stop type change counter 223g is a continuation display executed when a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 based on a ball entering the first left winning port 64a or the second winning port 640 is received. In the determination process (see FIG. 75), 1 is added when the currently stopped symbol of the fluctuation cannot be replaced. Also, in the stop type reception process (see FIG. 74) executed when the stop type command is received, 1 is subtracted when the stop type is changed to the stop display stop type (see S2252). Further, when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display, it is necessary to display the hold symbol in accordance with the change. Therefore, the stop type change counter 223g refers to the hold symbol setting process (see FIG. 76). Then, processing according to the value is executed.

  The stop type changed counter 223h is used to determine whether or not the stop symbol has been changed to the continuous display (see FIG. 62B) that suggests a pseudo continuous fluctuation by the above-described stop type counter 223g or the like. It is a counter. This stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 when the stop symbol is changed to continuous display in the stop type reception process (see S2053 in FIG. 74), and when the change is started in the change display setting process (ie, change) 1 is subtracted (when S2152 in FIG. 79). Further, the stop type change counter 223g is referred to in the suspended symbol setting process (see FIG. 76).

  The reserved symbol storage area 223j is an area for storing information on the reserved symbols to be displayed on the display control device 114. In the reserved symbol storage area 223j, the display number of the reserved symbols (normally reserved symbols) displayed in the Ds1 area and the reserved symbols (special reserved symbols) displayed in the Ds4 area of the third symbol display device 81 described above. There is an area for storing the number of displayed items. The reserved symbol storage area 223j is updated by a reserved symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) when a reserved ball number command is received from the main controller 110. Specific contents will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
In the control process in the third embodiment, a part of the content of the control process in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the second embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  A control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. The third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a part of the special symbol variation process, the jackpot setting process, and the start winning process is changed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the special symbol variation process (SS104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The same processes as those in the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  First, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is acquired (S203), and the variation execution determination process is executed (S251).

  Here, the variation execution determination process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this variation execution determination process (S251). This variation execution determination process (S251) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69), and a variation effect effect pattern performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. (Variation effect pattern) is a process for determining whether to execute the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c based on the values of various counters stored in the area. is there.

  In the fluctuation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the fluctuation execution flag 203w1 (S3001), and data in the fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is acquired (S3002). Thereafter, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is shifted (S3003). In the process of S3003, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203w2 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S3004).

  If it is determined in the process of S3004 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (S3004: Yes), the variable execution flag 203w1 is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (S3005), and this process ends. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (S3004: No), it is determined whether the execution area data is the special figure 2 (S3006). If it is determined in the process of S3006 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (S3006: Yes), the variable execution flag 203w1 is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S3007), and this process ends. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3006 that the execution area data is not special figure 2 (S3006: No), since there is no reserved ball to be executed in a variable manner, this processing is terminated while the variable execution flag 203w1 remains in the initial state. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When the process of S251 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variable execution is performed in FIG. 2 (S252). Specifically, referring to the variable execution flag 203w1 set by the processing of S251, if the variable execution flag 203w1 is special figure 2, it is determined that the variable execution is performed in special figure 2.

  In the process of S251, when it is determined that the variation is executed in the special figure 2 (S252: Yes), the process similar to that in the first embodiment described above is performed from S205 to S208 in order to start the fluctuation of the second special symbol. This process is executed to end the present process. On the other hand, when it is determined in FIG. 2 that the variable execution is not performed (S252: No), the process proceeds to S253.

  In the process of S253, when it is determined that the variable execution is not performed in FIG. 1 (S253: No), this process is ended as it is because there is no reserved ball to be subjected to the variable execution. On the other hand, if it is determined in FIG. 1 that the execution is fluctuating (S253: Yes), the processing from S210 to S213, which is the same processing as in the first embodiment described above, is executed, and this processing is terminated. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is determined prior to that of FIG. 1, but whether or not to execute the fluctuation in FIG. You may make it discriminate | determine first. Thereby, it can be set which of FIG. 1 and special figure 2 is distinguished preferentially.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S213), the ratio of selecting the big hit B and the big hit C is set to be different from those in the special symbol 1 variation start process 2 (S208). As described above, the jackpot type B is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot C, and the selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 has a higher selection ratio of the jackpot B, so the selection table 202b2 for the special chart 2 It is advantageous for the player to select the jackpot type based on the game. That is, the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 is more advantageous than the jackpot based on the ball entering the first left winning port 64a.

  As a result, if the adjustment nails t1 and t2 are adjusted so that the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 can easily win the second prize opening 640, it can be adjusted to be advantageous to the player. If it is adjusted so that it is not, it can be adjusted so as to be disadvantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is set to be different between the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. For example, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, "4 rounds" is selected. "Large jackpot" is selected, and in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, whether or not it is advantageous for the player by adjusting the type of jackpot so that "16 round jackpot" is selected is adjusted You may be able to do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 3 (S254). This jackpot setting process 3 (S254) is a process that is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69) and performs setting for starting the jackpot game. In the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is a jackpot for the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (S2551). The difference is that the jackpot type is determined according to the result (S2552 or S2553), and the other points are the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

  First, in the jackpot setting process 3 (S233), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is the first special symbol (S2551). If it is determined by the process of S2551 that the first special symbol is a big hit (S2551: Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, and the process proceeds to S2502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not jackpot (the second special symbol jackpot) by the process of S2551, the jackpot type is determined based on the special chart 2 selection table 202b2, and the process proceeds to S2502. Transition. By the processing of S2551-S2553, the jackpot type corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be determined, and the jackpot game can be executed based on the jackpot type.

  When the process proceeds to the process of S2502, the processes of S2502 to S2504 are executed and the present process is terminated as in the second embodiment.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first left winning opening 64a. This is a process for judging whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the two winning opening 640, and in the case where there is a starting winning, holding processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start winning) in the first left winning opening 64a (S501). Here, the ball entering the first left winning opening 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first left winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  If there is no winning at the left first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning at the first left winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S503: No), the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first left winning opening 64a (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 is held. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 66) described later executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are displayed as special symbols. 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a (S506), the special figure 1 is set in the first area of the change order storage area 203k (S551), and the process proceeds to S507. In the process of S551, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203w is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203k in the fluctuation execution determination process (S251) described above, the start opening fluctuates the first special symbol as in this embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even when there are two types of fluctuations that change the symbol, the fluctuations can be started in the order of winning in the starting slot.

  In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) at the second prize opening 640 (S507). If it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S507: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is processed in the same manner as when winning the left first winning opening 64a.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S509: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S510), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S511). Then, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S512), and to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k. Special figure 2 is set (S552), and this process ends. Note that the determination of the first area in S552 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S551.

  If there is no winning at the first winning opening 640 (S507: No), or even if there is a winning at the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not less than 4. (S509: No), the process proceeds to the prefetch process (S513), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 79. In the second control example, part of the command determination process 2 (S1611), the stop type reception process (S1705), and the variable display setting process (S1612) is changed with respect to the first control example. In other respects, the rest of the configuration is the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, the command determination process 3 (S1611) in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the command determination process 3 (S1611). In the third embodiment, compared to the second embodiment, a stop type reception process (S1751) is executed instead of the processes of S1705 and S1706, and a continuous display determination process (S1708) is executed instead of the process of S1708. S1751) and the point that it is changed to execute the reserved symbol setting process (S1752). Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process 3 (S1611), first, similarly to the second embodiment, the processes of S1701 to S1704 are executed. If it is determined in step S1704 that a stop type command has been received, a stop type reception process is executed (S1705), and the process ends.

  Here, the stop type reception process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the stop type reception process (S1705).

  In the stop type reception process (S1705), first, the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3101), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the stop type counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3103). In the process of S3103, if it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is 0 (S3103: No), it is not necessary to change the stop type, and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the stop type counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3103: Yes), it is necessary to change the stop type. Change (S3104). Thereafter, the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S2053), the stop type changed counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S3105), and this process ends.

  Here, in the stop type change counter 223i, the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more because the game ball has entered the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640 during the period in which the changing effect cannot be replaced. In this case, 1 is added. When the stop type change counter 223i is incremented by 1, the received stop type can be changed to the stop display stop type in the process of S3104. Thereby, even when a game ball enters during the period in which the variable effect cannot be replaced and the number of held balls becomes 5 or more, the stop type of the next variable effect can be changed to the stop type of continuous display. . Thereby, the player can recognize that the changing effect is continuously executed and the next changing effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is 4 balls, but the actual number of reserved balls is 5, the actual held ball without making the player feel uncomfortable. By reducing the number from 5 balls to 4 balls, it is possible to start the variation effect.

  In addition, by adding 1 to the stop type changed counter 223h here, whether to increase the reserved symbol setting process (see FIG. 77) in the reserved symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) described later, or to decrease the reserved symbol at the decrease It is possible to determine whether to execute the setting process (see FIG. 78).

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1704 that a stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not a pending ball number command has been received (S1706). If it is determined in the processing of S1706 that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1706: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the reserved ball number counter of the corresponding special symbol (S1707). A continuous display determination process is executed (S1751), a reserved symbol setting process is executed (S1752), and this process is terminated.

  Here, the continuation determination process (S1751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the continuation determination process (S1751). In the continuation determination process (S1751), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 receives a pending ball number command transmitted based on the game ball entering the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640. It is a process executed in this case. In the continuation determination process (S1751), based on the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the stop type is set to the stop type of the continuous display. This is a process for determining whether or not to change.

  In the continuous display determination process (S1751), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are acquired (S3201), and the total value thereof. It is determined whether (N1 + N2) is greater than 4 (S3202). In the process of S3202, when it is determined that the total value (N1 + N2) is not greater than 4 (that is, 4 or less) (S3202: No), it is not necessary to change the stop type. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3202 that the total value (N1 + N2) is greater than 4 (that is, 5 or more) (S3202: Yes), then whether the stop type changed counter 223h is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3203: No), the stop pattern change counter being executed has already been changed to continuous display. 1 is added (S3207), and this processing is terminated. Thereby, it can prevent that a stop symbol overlaps and is changed to a continuous display.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the stop type changed counter 223h is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replacement period (S3204). If it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop symbol is not replaceable, the stop type change counter is incremented by 1 to change the stop symbol of the next variation effect as described above (S3207). This process ends.

  Here, in the process of S3204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol can be replaced during the change period. The period during which the stop symbol can be changed during the change period (replaceable period) is determined in advance. It is determined for each variation pattern, and it is determined by a timer (not shown) whether or not the period has elapsed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3204 that it is a stop symbol replacement period, a display stop type command (continuous display) is set (S3205), and 1 is added to the stop type changed counter 223h (S3206). This process is terminated. The display stop type command (continuous display) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (see FIG. 52). In S1802), it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives this display stop type command (continuous display) so that the stop symbol is continuously displayed when the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol. The information of the set stop type is overwritten.

  Further, because the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 by the process of S3206, as described above, it is possible to suppress execution of the change of the overlapping stop type in the process of S3203.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the holding symbol setting process (S1752) executed after the continuous display determination process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 76 is a view showing a flowchart of the reserved symbol setting process (S1752). This holding symbol setting process (S1752) is a process executed when a holding ball number command is received from the main controller 110, and based on the change of whether the holding ball number increases or decreases, the holding ball This is a process for executing a process corresponding to a change in the number.

  In the reserved symbol setting process, first, data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3301), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Are acquired (S3302). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased according to the values acquired by the processing of S3301 and S3302 (S3303).

  Specifically, the sum of the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is the display of the normal reserved symbol in the reserved symbol storage area 223i. If it is larger than the sum of the number and the number of special reserved symbols displayed, it is determined that the number is increased, and if it is smaller, it is determined that the number is decreased.

  Here, when the number of held balls changes due to the winning of a game ball or the start of variation of a special symbol, a held ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is transmitted. When this reserved ball number command is received, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (by the process of S1707 of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 73)) N2) is updated. Thereafter, the reserved symbol setting process (S1752) is executed, and by comparing the total value of the reserved symbol counter (223b, 223f) of the special symbol with the total value of the display number of the reserved symbol storage area 223i, It can be determined whether the number of reserved balls has increased or decreased.

  In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: Yes), an increase-time reserved symbol setting process is executed (S3304), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: No), a decrease holding symbol setting process is executed (S3305), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the increase time reserved symbol setting process (S3304) will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the increased time reserved symbol setting process (S3304). The increase holding symbol setting process (S 3304) is a holding ball transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of holding balls increases based on the ball entering the first left winning port 64 a or the second winning port 640. This is processing when a number command is received. Based on the increase in the number of held balls, the data in the held symbol storage area 223i is updated, and a display reserved ball number command for displaying the held symbols on the display control device 114 is set. It is a process to do.

  In the increase reserved symbol setting process, first, data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the display number of the normally reserved symbols stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is 4 (S3402). If it is determined in the processing of S3402 that there are four normal reserved symbols (S3402: Yes), the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) has reached the upper limit (4). Then, 1 is added to the display number of the special reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds4) (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of normal reserved symbols is not 4 (S3402: No), the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) reaches the upper limit (4). Therefore, 1 is added to the display number of the normally reserved symbols (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405.

  When the process of S3402 or S3403 is completed, a display reserved ball number command is set based on the reserved symbol storage area 223i updated by the process of S3402 or S3403 (S3405), and this process ends. The display reserved ball number command set in the process of S3405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1802) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. Are transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display controller 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display controller 114 executes a process of updating the display of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display of the reserved symbol on the third symbol display device 81 can be updated based on the fact that the main control device 110 has detected the winning of the game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a decrease-time reserved symbol setting process (S3305) will be described. FIG. 78 is a view showing a flowchart of the decrease hold symbol setting process (S3305). This decrease reserved symbol setting process (S3305) is a process in the case of receiving a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of reserved balls decreases based on the start of fluctuation of special symbols. This is a process for updating the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i based on the decrease in the number of reserved balls and setting a display reserved ball number command for causing the display control device 114 to display the reserved symbols.

  In the decrease reserved symbol setting process (S3305), first, data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3501). Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type change counter 223g is greater than 0 (S3502). If it is determined in the process of S3502 that the stop type change counter 223g is greater than 0 (S3502: Yes), the display number of the special reserved symbol in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is decremented by 1 (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3505. Transition. In the process of S3502, if the stop type completion change counter 223h is greater than 0, the stop type has been changed to continuous display in the previous special symbol change, and the stop display before the start of the current change becomes a continuous display. Is the case.

  Thereby, when the stop display of the special symbol variation started last time is the continuous display (see FIG. 62B), the display number of the special reserved symbol is subtracted by 1, so that the special symbol variation started this time is reduced. Based on this, the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4 in the third symbol display device 81 can be decreased by one. Since the previous stop display of the fluctuation display is a continuous display that suggests continuous fluctuation, the player can change the special symbol without reducing the reserved symbols of the small area Ds1, which is an aspect that the player can easily recognize. There is no sense of incompatibility even if it is started. As a result, without making the player feel uncomfortable, the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4 that is difficult for the player to recognize can be reduced by one and the special symbol can be changed.

  Here, the stop type changed counter 223h is added by the stop type receiving process when the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (that is, when the number of held balls is 5 or more and a special hold symbol is set). . Therefore, when the stop type changed counter 223h is larger than 0, there is a case where there is a special reserved symbol. Thereby, there is no problem that the number of special reserved symbols is not displayed and cannot be subtracted in the processing of S3503. In the process of S3503, if the number of special reserved symbols displayed is 0 and cannot be subtracted, an error process may be performed. Specifically, a process of setting a display error command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 to perform display indicating an error is exemplified. As a result, it is possible to detect a problem in which the stop type changed counter is added even though the number of special reserved symbols displayed is 0 due to the influence of noise or the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3502 that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3502: No), the stop type is changed to continuous display in the previous special symbol variation. Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the special reserved symbol, the display number of the normal reserved symbol is decremented by 1 (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507.

  Thereby, when there is no special reserved symbol, the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) can be reduced by one. In addition, when there is a special reserved symbol, the stop type changed counter 223h is 0, that is, the special symbol that has been started last time has not been changed to the continuous display, and therefore the special reserved symbol is not changed. As in the case where there is not, the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) can be reduced by one.

  As described above, when the variation effect is stopped by the continuous display (see FIG. 62B), the special reserved symbol can be reduced by one and displayed at the start of the next variation effect by the processing of S3503. (See FIG. 62 (c)). On the other hand, when the variation effect is not stopped by the continuous display, the process of S3504 can be displayed with the normal reserved symbol decreased by one at the start of the next variation effect (see FIG. 64A).

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the stop type has been changed by adding and subtracting the stop type changed counter 223h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be stored in a ring buffer or the like so that it can be discriminated by referring to the stop type displayed last stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the variable display setting process 3 (S1612) will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable display setting process 3 (S1612). The variation display setting process 3 (S1612) in the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a determination process of the stop type changed counter 223h and a subtraction process are added, and other processes. Since they are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  When the processing of S2104 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the stop type changed counter 223h is greater than 0 (S2151). In the process of S2151, it is determined that the stop type changed counter is greater than 0 when the stop type is changed in the special symbol change started before the change of the special symbol starting the current change. Therefore, the stop type changed counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S2152), and the process proceeds to S2105.

  As a result, since the stop type changed counter 223h can be subtracted after the execution of the special symbol variable display in which the stop type is changed to the continuous display, the change in the next special symbol in which the stop type is changed to the continuous display. Only at the start of the change of display, the special reserved symbol (the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4) can be reduced by the process of S3503 of the above-described decreasing reserved symbol setting process (S3303). Therefore, when the stop symbol of the continuous display is not displayed, the special reserved symbol (the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4), which is a mode in which the player is difficult to recognize, is reduced, and the variation of the special symbol is not started. When the continuation display stop symbol is not displayed, the normal symbol (the symbol reserved in the small area Ds1), which is a mode that the player can easily see, is reduced and the special symbol starts to change. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage port 645 enters the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640, A jackpot lottery will be held. The left first winning port 64a and the second winning port 640 are set with a prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 65 (d)) so that the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball enters is different. Yes. Specifically, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a is one, whereas the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 is There are 3 balls. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player if a large number of game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 win the second winning opening 640, while it is disadvantageous for the player otherwise.

  Also, in the jackpot based on the left first winning port 64a and the jackpot based on the second winning port 640, the jackpot type based on the second winning port 640 is more easily selected so that the jackpot type advantageous to the player can be selected. A first hit type selection table 202b is set. Specifically, in the jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a, “jackpot C” is more likely to be selected than “jackpot B” (see FIG. 66 (a)), and in the jackpot based on the second winning slot 640, “jackpot” “Big hit B” is easier to select than “C” (FIG. 66B).

  Here, as described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is advantageous to the player because the lottery for determining whether or not it is likely to change is performed rather than the “big hit C”. Therefore, the jackpot based on the winning at the second winning opening 640 is more easily selected than the jackpot based on the winning at the first left winning opening 64a, which is a jackpot advantageous for the player.

  Accordingly, the number of balls to be paid into the second winning port 640 is larger than the number of balls to be paid into the first left winning port 64a, and a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. In comparison, it is a more advantageous entry for the player. As a result, the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening 645 to the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 is adjusted by the adjustment nails t1 and t2, compared with the second embodiment. The adjustment of whether or not it is advantageous for the player can be adjusted with more or less strength.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the winning at the second winning opening 640 is configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player can be easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning at the left first winning opening 64a is performed. The jackpot based on the may be configured such that a jackpot advantageous to the player is easily selected. Thus, in terms of the number of payout balls, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the first left winning opening 64a, and in the selection of the jackpot type, the first left winning is more than the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to enter the mouth 64a. Thereby, it can adjust so that it may not become too advantageous or too disadvantageous for a player.

  In the third embodiment, the reserved symbol indicating that the number of reserved balls is greater than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment) is a special reserved symbol (of the third symbol device 81) that is difficult for a player to recognize. This is displayed with the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4 (see FIG. 60B). Thereby, for example, when adjusting not to enter any one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. The player will be dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls will not increase from 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls will be 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction.

  In addition, although the electric accessories 645a and 645b are arranged so as to make it easier to enter the game ball into the passage port 645, the present invention is not limited thereto, and only the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b receive game balls. You may comprise so that it may guide easily. In this case, the side wall forming the left first entrance 64a or the right first prize entrance 64b of the base body 64c is configured by rotating blades (electrical accessories), and the game ball is rotated by rotating. It is good also as a structure which makes it easy to enter into the left 1st entrance 64a or the right 1st entrance 64b. By adopting such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, it is possible to pay out a lot of game balls during a short time or a certain change, and the player's possession ball decreases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for shifting to the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol 1 lottery is executed when winning the first left winning port 64a, and a special symbol 2 lottery is executed when winning the first right winning port 64b. Here, when the big win is made by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the big win game to which the probability variation game is easily given is more easily executed than the case where the special symbol 1 is the big hit. Therefore, by placing the electric accessory in place of the side wall of the right first winning opening 64b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be executed during the probability change or during the time reduction, so in the probability change state or the time reduction state The probability variation game can be easily given (the probability that the probability variation game is given can be increased).

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 93. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of probability variation states having different degrees of advantage for the player and a plurality of time-short states having different degrees of advantage are provided. More specifically, in the present embodiment, it is configured that it is easier for the player to obtain more benefits as compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, when the player wins by the lottery of the second special symbol. In other words, when winning a lottery in the second special symbol, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than in the case of winning the lottery in the first special symbol. The ratio of transition to the probability variation state is increased (a jackpot type that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is easily selected). As the special symbol probability change state, the first special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the probability change state 1. Probability state 2 is provided (i.e. relatively advantageous). In addition, as the short time state of the normal symbol, the first special symbol lottery is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the second special symbol lottery is executed as compared with the short time state 1 at that time. An easy (i.e. relatively advantageous) time reduction state 2 is provided. By varying the amount of prize balls that can be acquired according to the state and the rate of transition to the probable state, it is possible to play a game aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. The probability variation state 1 is a state in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state 1 are combined, and the probability variation state 2 is a state in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state 2 are complex.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and is provided in the main controller 110. First, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223, a part of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are described in the first embodiment. This is a point changed from the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88, the game board 13 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, there are provided three entrances through which a special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters. Specifically, a first entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 and a second right entrance of the right provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the front. 64b and a right first entrance 64a2 provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the right second entrance 64b.

  The first special entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are all subjected to the first special symbol lottery when the ball enters. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two types of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. It is.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, a first working combination 645a is attached to the right first entrance 64a2. The first actuating member 645a is in an open state in which a ball can enter the right first entrance 64a2 (easy) and cannot enter a ball into the right first entrance 64a2 ( It is variable to a closed state that becomes difficult. The first working combination 645a is switched to an open state when a ball enters a first working port 704 provided in the distribution winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first working combination 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  Similarly, a second actuating accessory 645b is attached to the right second entrance 64b. The second actuating member 645b is also in an open state in which a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b (easy), and a ball cannot enter the right second entrance 64b ( It is variable to a closed state which becomes difficult The second working combination 645b associated with the second working combination 645b is switched to an open state when a ball enters the second working port 707 provided in the distribution winning device 700. On the other hand, the second working combination 645b that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  An allocation winning device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. This distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered the ball into either the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first operation opening 704 (when entering the ball), the first working combination 645a associated with the right first entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entry A ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation opening 707 (if it enters the ball), the second working accessory 645b attached to the right second entry port is switched to the open state, and the right second entry port 64b is reached. And the ball is ready to enter.

  Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the distribution winning device 700. FIG. The upper surface side of the distribution prize winning device 700 is configured to allow the ball to flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, since the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the sphere that has reached the upper surface of the distribution winning device 700 basically flows down in the lower left direction. To do. In addition, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the prize distribution device 700. The electric accessory 701 includes an open state (immersion state) in which a ball can enter (easy) and a closed state (protrusion state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And can be switched to. This electric accessory 701 is set to an open state when a normal symbol is won by lottery.

  The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. Since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first channel 703, the sphere that has flowed down the first channel 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the ball flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707. In addition, at a position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 branch, a flow path through which the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 flows via the electric accessory 701 is switched to a switching valve ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slids and displaces) between a first switching state in which the sphere flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the sphere flows down to the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slid to the left when viewed from the front to close the upstream side of the second flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. Advances to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right when viewed from the front, thereby closing the upstream side of the first flow path and opening only the first flow path. The sphere proceeds to the second flow path.

  The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state. After a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol is hit) ) Is switched from the first switching state to the second switching state. In addition, when a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after switching to the second switching state, the switching to the first switching state is performed again.

  If the ball can enter the sorting prize winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down toward the second operation port 707. When the ball enters the second working port 707, the second working combination 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second entering port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which has a high ratio of giving the special symbol certainty change state when it is a big hit, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow direction (whether the first flow path 703 flows down or the second flow path 707 flows down) of the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 81, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first working port 704 is made of a known non-electrically-operated accessory, that is, the first working accessory 645a is switched to an open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the first working port 704. Can do. Further, when the first working combination 645a is in the open state, the first working combination 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entrance 64a2.

  On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second operation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operation mechanism 705. In other words, the second working combination 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second working port 707. Further, when the second working combination 645b is in the open state, the second working combination 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entrance 64b.

  In this way, by entering the ball into the distribution winning device 700, the ball enters the first working port 704 or the second working port 707, and the first working combination 645a or The two actuating items 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, a big win in the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. It can be noted. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700. As shown in FIG. 82, there are two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) of the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701. When the opening pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the normal symbol hit is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Is done. Then, after the open state for 0.1 seconds is set, the hit state ends. During the 1-second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period is distributed to the first operation port 704. . On the other hand, since the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state during the 0.1 second opening period, the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 during this period is the second operating port 707. It is distributed to. However, since it is difficult to enter the ball during the 0.1 second opening period, in many cases, the ball that has entered the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern A is set is The distribution is made to the first operation port 704, and the right first entrance 64a1 is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (that is, 0.1 second) immediately after the normal symbol hit is started, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, after the open state is set for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second), the hit state ends. During the 0.1 second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 during this period is directed to the first operating port 704. Sorted. However, as described above, it is difficult to enter a sphere during an extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, since the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state during the 1-second opening period, the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 during this period is directed to the second operating port 707. Sorted. Therefore, in many cases, a ball that has entered the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is distributed to the second operation port 707, and the right second entrance 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

  In this way, since the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the set opening pattern, it is possible to make the opening pattern interested every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In the present embodiment, the set opening pattern is determined according to the gaming state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability changing non-time-short state), time-saving state 1 and probability-changing state 1, when the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. On the other hand, in the time reduction state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the release pattern B is set when the normal drawing is hit. For this reason, in the short time state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time reduction state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the second special symbol drawing is difficult to be executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this way, since the type of special symbol that is easily executed according to the gaming state can be varied, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the game board 13, and a horizontally long specific winning opening (large opening) 65 a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit is made by the big hit lottery performed due to the first entry 64a1, the right first entrance 64a2, or the right second entrance 64b (winning), After a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 42 to 44) in the second embodiment. Since it is as described above in the second embodiment, the details are omitted, but the game ball that has entered the variable pitching device 65 during the jackpot passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot so that the jackpot Probability state is given after completion.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 90. First, FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 90A is a selection for the special figure 1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90B shows the contents of the table 202b1, and FIG. 90B shows the contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. The special figure 1 selection table 202b1 is referred to determine the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery is won, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is the second special symbol lottery. When the jackpot is hit, it is referred to determine the jackpot type.

  First, the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9”. The jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four and the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability changing switch 65e to pass during the jackpot, and the time-short state 1 is given after the jackpot. . Note that the pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e is, for example, that the probability variation solenoid (flow-path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (providing the probability variation switch 65e in the variable winning device 65). The flow pattern is opened). Since the player hits the ball continuously toward the variable winning device 65 at the jackpot, one or more balls can flow down to the probability changing switch 65e in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability change switch 65e at the jackpot, a probability change state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot. That is, the probability variation state 1 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state 1 are combined after the big hit is given. On the other hand, when the big hit ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e during the big hit due to the player not hitting the ball during the big hit, only the short time state 1 is given after the big hit. The jackpot A is likely to be in the probability variation state, but the probability variation state to be imparted is the probability variation state 1, and since it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery during the probability variation state, the jackpot type (probability variation state 2 is likely to be imparted) It is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

  The jackpot B is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 49”. This jackpot B is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability changing switch 65e to pass during the jackpot, and the short-time state 2 is given after the jackpot. . When the ball passes the probability change switch 65e at the jackpot, a probability change state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot. That is, the probability variation state 2 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state 2 are combined after the big hit is given. On the other hand, when the big hit ends without the ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e during the big hit, for example, because the player did not hit the ball during the big hit, only the short time state 2 is given after the big hit B ends. The jackpot B is one of the jackpot types that are most advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot because the jackpot B easily shifts to the probability variation state 2 that is most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the award ball is disadvantageous in the award sphere because it is less than in the case of a big win by lottery of the second special symbol.

  The jackpot C is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 94”. This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability changing switch 65e cannot pass during the jackpot, and the short-time state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. The pattern incapable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e is, for example, that the probability variation solenoid (flow-path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability variation switch in the variable winning device 65). (The flow path provided with 65e is opened). Even if the ball is entered at the same time as the 4th round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the probability changing solenoid 65k in 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the sphere reaches the probability changing solenoid 65k. Therefore, in jackpot C, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot. In other words, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the special symbol probability change state is not given and the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed and the short-time state 1 is given, and the number of winning balls is also the second special symbol. Since it is less compared to the case where a lottery is won, it will be the most unfavorable jackpot type for the player.

  A jackpot D is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 94”. This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability changing switch 65e cannot pass during the jackpot, and the time-short state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. The probability variation state is not given, and the number of prize balls is small compared to the case where the second special symbol lottery is won, but since the short time state 2 where the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is given, the big hit D Is advantageous as compared to jackpot C.

  Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, as in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 19”. This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass the probability changing switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-short state 1 is given after the jackpot. . The jackpot E is likely to be in the probability variation state, but the probability variation state to be imparted is the probability variation state 1, and since it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery during the probability variation state, the jackpot type (probability variation state 2 is likely to be imparted) Compared to jackpot B and jackpot F), the state after the jackpot is disadvantageous.

  The jackpot F is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 79”. This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass the probability changing switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-short state 2 is given after the jackpot. . The jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot because the jackpot F is likely to shift to the probability variation state 2 that is most advantageous for the player. Also, in terms of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a larger quantity of prize balls than in the case where a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the jackpot that is most advantageous to the player.

  The jackpot G is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “80 to 84”. This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability changing switch 65e cannot pass during the jackpot, and the short-time state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the special symbol probability change state is not given and the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed and the short-time state 1 is given, the gaming state after the jackpot is most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of the prize ball, it is more advantageous than winning a big win by drawing the first special symbol.

  The jackpot H is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “85 to 94”. This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the probability changing switch 65e cannot be passed during the jackpot, and the short-time state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. Although the probability variation state is not given, the short time state 2 is given in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, so that the big hit H is more advantageous than the big hit C or the big hit G. Also, the award sphere is more advantageous than a big win in the first special symbol lottery.

  Thus, in this embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type is different in the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot, when the jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which jackpot type will be. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Also, depending on whether the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of winning balls that can be obtained and the ratio of the big hit type that becomes an operation pattern that can pass the probability variation switch 65e are Is different. In other words, the winner of the second special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player because more prize balls can be obtained. In addition, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the big hit type (big hit E, F) that becomes the operation pattern that can pass the probability variation switch 65e is 80%, whereas the first In the special symbol lottery, the ratio of the big hit type (big hit A, B) that becomes an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e is 50%. Therefore, it is more likely that the player who wins the big win in the second special symbol will be in a probable state. Therefore, since it can be expected that the player will win a big win in the second special symbol lottery, whether the lottery executed is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery It is possible to play a game paying attention to. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83, the transition method of the game state in this embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, five gaming states are provided, and as described above, a gaming state is newly set after the jackpot is ended each time a jackpot is reached. As shown in FIG. 83, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probability non-short-time state), basically, unless the ball launching is stopped during the jackpot, the transition to the probability change state 1 is made and the jackpot B is reached. Then, the state shifts to the probability change state 2. Further, when the big hit C is reached, the state shifts to the short-time state 1, and when the big hit D is reached, the state shifts to the short-time state 2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is the short-time state 1 (short-time state in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed) and the probability variation state 1 (probability variation state in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed). Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probability non-short-time state). Although illustration is omitted, in the time-saving state 1 or the probability variation state 1, if a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of time-savings is executed without making a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is the short-time state 2 (the short-time state in which the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed), when the big hit E is reached, the game shifts to the probability variation state 1 and becomes the big hit F. Then, when the state shifts to the most favorable probability variation state 2, when the big hit G is reached, the state shifts to the short time state 1, and when the big hit H is reached, the state shifts to the short time state 2 (loops through the short time state 2). Also, as shown in FIG. 83, the same state transition as in the time reduction state 2 is performed also in the probability variation state 2 (the probability variation state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed). Although illustration is omitted, in the time-short state 2 or the probability variation state 2, when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of time-shorts is executed without making a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passage counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, operation counter 203t3, counter buffer 203h, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5 , A probability variation valid flag 203 t 6, a probability variation valid timer 203 t 7, a discharge number counter 203 t 8, an hour / middle counter 203 u, an hour / hour identification flag 203 x, a big hit flag 203 i, and other memory areas 203 z.

  Among these, special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol Regarding the reserved ball number counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203g, the counter buffer 203h, the big hit flag 203i, and the other memory area 203z, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Reserved ball storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 03i, and is identical with other memory areas 203Z, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Further, the probability variation passing counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation valid flag 203t6, the probability variation valid timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 are respectively described in the second embodiment. Is the same as the probability variation passing counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation valid flag 203t6, the probability variation valid timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 provided in the RAM 203. . Since these details are described above in the description of the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  The time reduction identification flag 203x is a flag for identifying the type of the time reduction state. If 0 is set in the short time identification flag 203x at this time, it means that the short time state 1 (probability change state 1). Note that, in the normal state where the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed as in the time reduction state 1, the time reduction identification flag 203x is set to 0. On the other hand, when 1 is set in the time reduction flag 203x, it means that the time reduction state 2 (probability change state 2). When the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time identification flag 203x. Specifically, when the short time identification flag 203x is 0 and the normal symbol is hit, the release pattern A is set, so that the ball is entered into the sorting prize winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first operation port 704, and the ball can enter the first left entrance 64a2. On the other hand, when the short time identification flag 203x is 1, when the normal symbol is hit, the release pattern B is set, so that the ball is entered into the sorting prize winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The sphere enters the second operating port 707, and the sphere can enter the left second entrance 64b. The short time identification flag 203x is set to a value corresponding to the short time state given after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot. Further, 0 is set when the short time period of the normal symbol is finished (that is, when the short time medium counter 203u becomes 0).

  In the normal state (non-probability change non-short-time state), the short-time identification flag 203x is set to 0 because the ball is shot in the right direction of the game board 13 in the non-time-short state (so-called right-handed) irregular game. This is to suppress the method. In other words, if the time-shortage identification flag 203x is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player will always make a right-handed strike in order to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery. In a normal state, since the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, it is difficult to enter a ball into the right second entrance 64b. Since it is in a probable change state, the merit in the case of a big hit becomes large. Therefore, an irregular game method may be induced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time-short identification flag 203x is set to 0 in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, and the open pattern A is set even if it is hit. It can be in a state where there is no merit to perform right-handed. Therefore, since the player can be left-handed in the normal state, an irregular gaming method can be prevented (suppressed).

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the big symbol is won in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91), and is set to OFF in the ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 91 to 93. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 4 (S164) performed instead of the special symbol fluctuation | variation process (refer FIG. 49) in 1st Embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S164).

  Of special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 91, S164), S201 to S218, S220. In the processes of S222 to S224, first, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment, S201 to S218, S220. And the same process as each process of S222-S224 is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91) in the fourth embodiment, when the big hit start is set in the process of S218 (S280), then the values of the hour / minute counter 203u and the probability variation counter 203g are set to the initial values (this In the embodiment, the value is reset to 0) (S271), and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203u is greater than 0 (S272). If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203u is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the hour / middle counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S273), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203u is 0 (S272: No), the process of S273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 93, the prefetch process 4 in the present fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process 4 (S513). This prefetch process 4 (S513) is a process executed in place of the prefetch process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment.

  Of the prefetching process 4 (S513) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S601 and S603 are the same as the processes of S601 and S603 of the prefetching process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment, respectively. Executed.

  In the prefetch process 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S601 that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64a1 right first entrance 64a2 or right second entrance 64b. (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is a special symbol probability variation state (S671). A lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per 1 (S672), and the process proceeds to S674.

  On the other hand, in the process of S671, when it is determined that the gaming state is a special symbol probability change state (S671: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table for high probability (S673), The process proceeds to S674. In the process of S674, based on the lottery result, a winning information command including each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which is a jackpot determination result, is set (S674).

  After the winning information command is set by the processing of S674, it is determined whether or not the lottery predicted by the processing of S672 or S673 is a special symbol jackpot of the special symbol (S675). When the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is a special symbol probable big hit (S675: Yes), the pre-reading probable changing flag (not shown) is set to ON (S676), and this processing is performed. finish. This pre-reading probability changing flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of execution is a probability changing state. If it is on, it means that the lottery time is in the probability changing state. It means a low probability state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning of the lottery predicted in the process of S675 is not a special symbol jackpot of the special symbol (S675: No), the success of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is the normal jackpot of the special symbol. Is determined (S677). When it is determined that the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is the special big hit of the special symbol (S677: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag (not shown) is set to OFF (S678), This process ends. On the other hand, if the determination of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is not normal for the special symbol (S677: No), the processing of S678 is skipped and the processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 4. The normal symbol variation process 4 is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88), the processes of S701 to S714 and S718 to S725 are respectively S701 to S714 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of ~ S725 is executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S714 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714: Yes), the time-shortening identification flag. It is determined whether 203x is 0, that is, whether it is the time reduction state 1 (S771). When it is determined that the flag is the identification flag 1 (short time state 2) (S771: No), the electric accessory release pattern B is set (S772). On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the time-short state in the process of S714 (S714: No), or when it is determined that the identification flag is 0 (time-short state 1) in the process of S771 (S771: Yes), the electric accessory release pattern A is set (S773).

  Here, although the details will be described later, the electric accessory release pattern A is the electric accessory 701 at the timing when the game ball is guided to the first operation port 704 when the game ball enters the distribution prize device 700. Is an open pattern in which is projected (opened). Accordingly, when the game ball enters the first operation port 704, the first working combination 645a is opened, and it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the right first entrance port 64a2, and the game ball enters the first operation port 704a. By doing so, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Note that the setting of the hour / short identification flag 203x is performed in the processing of S4106 and S4107 of ending processing 4 (FIG. 93, S1379) described later at the time of ending the jackpot game, and the value is set to 0 or 0 based on the executed jackpot type. 1 is set. As a result, in the case of a big win, the hour / short identification flag 203x is set according to the jackpot type, so in the probability variation game (time / short game) to be executed later according to the big hit type, a game ball is placed at the right first entrance 64a2. It is possible to switch between setting whether to enter a ball or whether to set a game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b2. Therefore, since the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set more in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, the probability change advantageous to the player even in the same probability variable game state or short-time game state. It is possible to set a probability variation gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, next, the operation control of the variable flow path 702 is set (S774), and the process ends. Note that the operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is constant for all normal symbol hits, and is switched to guide the game ball to the first flow path for 1.5 seconds after hitting the normal symbols. The valve 702 is controlled by moving to the left side so as to close the second flow path 706, and then moved to the right side to close the first flow path 703 and guide the game ball to the second flow path. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a startup process 4 executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows this starting process 4. Of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1001 to S1014 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1014 of the startup process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. In the startup process 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S1010 is completed, the variable flow path 702 is initialized, and the process proceeds to S1011.

  Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1105). This jackpot control process 4 (S1105) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and performs various effects according to the jackpot and opens a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Or a process for closing.

  In the jackpot control process 4, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), it is not necessary to perform the big hit control, and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is a big hit start timing (S1371). If it is determined in the process of S1371 that it is a big hit start timing (S1371: Yes), an opening command is set (S1372), and this process ends.

  In the process of S1371, when it is determined that it is not the big hit start timing (S1371: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1374). When it is determined in the processing of S1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1374: Yes), the setting of the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning port 64a and the switching operation of the probability changing solenoid (channel solenoid) 65k are set. To execute the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375), the process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1374: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing of switching operation of the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376). ).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1376 that the timing of the switching operation of the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k has been reached (S1376: Yes), the state of the probability changing solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (S1377). The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1376, when it is determined that it is not the timing of switching operation of the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1378). ).

  In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: Yes), the ending process 4 is executed (S1379), and this process ends. Details of the ending process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1378: No), the winning process 4 is executed (S1380), the abnormal process 4 is executed (S1381), and this process is terminated. In the winning process 4 and the abnormal process 4, the same processes as the winning process (see FIG. 56) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment are executed. Since the contents are as described above in the description of the second embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375 in FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S4001). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S4001 (S4002). Then, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S4001 (S4003). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize-winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1379 in FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 4 (S1379). In the ending process 4 (S1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S4101). Next, the big hit flag 203i is set to OFF (S4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203s is ON (S4103). If it is determined in the process of S4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is on (S4103: Yes), the probability variation counter 203g is set to 100 (S4104). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203s is set to OFF based on the probability variation counter 203g being set to 100. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203s is not on (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105.

  In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game based on any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105). If it is determined in the process of S4105 that the jackpot is one of A, C, E, or G (S4105: Yes), 0 is set in the time reduction identification flag 203x (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4105 that none of the jackpots A, C, E, or G is found (S4105: No), 1 is set in the hour / hour discrimination flag 203x (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4108. To do.

  As a result of the processing of S4106 or S4107, the hourly time identification flag 203x is set to 0 or 1, so that the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 88) is switched.

  When the process of S4106 or S4107 is finished, 100 is set to the value of the hour / middle counter 203u (S4108), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the short time state (probability change gaming state or short time gaming state) is given, the short time state type set according to the jackpot type is set to be different. Thus, in a short time state executed after the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the allocation prize winning device 700, the game enters the first operation port 704 or enters the second operation port 707. It is possible to switch between whether to enter a game ball into the right first entrance 64a2 or to enter a game ball into the right second entrance 64b depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, in a short time state, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery is executed with the second special symbol. By setting the advantages to be given differently, it is possible to vary the magnitude of the privilege given to the player according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is varied between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the probability variation rate, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of time reductions, the variation time, etc. are changed to the first special symbol. You may set so that a privilege may differ by changing and setting with a 2nd special symbol. In addition, by adopting the configuration as in the present embodiment, even in the probability variation gaming state with the same jackpot probability, the type of the special symbol that fluctuates in the time shortening (probability variation) is switched depending on the type of the time-short state granted. The benefits that a player can receive in the probabilistic gaming state can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to set a probability variation gaming state in which a plurality of benefits to be granted are different. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot type guided to the probability variation switch 65e3 is set to be larger for the second special symbol than the first special symbol, a plurality of probability variation ratios can be set. Therefore, the probability variation ratio can be changed depending on the time-short state, and a game with a fresh taste can be provided to the player.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows a command determination process 4 (S1671) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart. The command determination process 4 (S1671) is a process for determining a command received from the main controller 110.

  The command determination process 4 (see FIG. 93) of the fourth embodiment is different only in that each process of S1713 to S1718 in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment is deleted. Since the other processes are the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, the details thereof are omitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage is different between the case where the big win is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol and the case where the big win is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, 2 It is configured so that the player who wins the big win in the special symbol lottery will be advantageous to the player. Moreover, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which provides two types of time-short states, the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2, as the time-short state given after the end of jackpot. The short-time state 1 is a short-time state in which the first special symbol lottery is easily executed (the ball is easy to enter the right first entrance 64a2), and the short-time state 2 is the second special symbol lottery. Is easy to be executed (the ball is likely to enter the right second entrance 64b). More specifically, in the short time state 1, when it is a win, it is electrically driven at a timing at which it is easy to enter the first operating port 704 inside the sorting prize winning device 700 (the first operating accessory 645 a is easily opened). The accessory 701 is opened. Therefore, by making a right turn in the short time state 1, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right first entrance 64 a 1, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is easily performed. On the other hand, in the short-time state 2, when winning, it is easy to enter the second operating port 707 inside the sorting prize winning device 700 (at the time when the second operating combination 645 b is easy to open), the electric combination 701. Is released. Therefore, by making a right turn in the short-time state 2, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right second entrance 64b, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a probability variation switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and a jackpot type in which a ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during jackpot by changing the internal flow path (easy), A jackpot type is provided in which the ball cannot pass (difficult) through the probability variation switch 65e3. Then, by changing the proportion of jackpot types that can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol is probable. The ratio of shifting is variable. That is, it is configured such that the winner of the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to shift to the probable change state than the case where the winner of the lottery of the first special symbol is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. More attention can be paid to whether the ball enters the operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probability variation state as in the time-short state. That is, the probability variation state 1 in which the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the probability variation state 2 in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed are provided. The rate of transition to the probability variation state differs depending on whether the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, and a plurality of probability variation states with different degrees of advantage depending on the probability variation state to be given Since it is provided, a game can be performed aiming at a better state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 101 and FIG. 133. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower right region of the game board 13, and the ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. It was configured to give a certain change state after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different in that the first variable winning device 65 is deleted. In addition, about the structure same as 4th Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a game that targets the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is executed in a normal game state. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entrance of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won. In addition, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, the probability of winning a jackpot by a special drawing lottery after the jackpot game ends will be high, and the probability varying gaming state (hereinafter, the probable variation state) Although the probability of winning a jackpot does not change, a short-time gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a short-time state) that makes it easy to receive a special drawing lottery is given.

  Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of FIG. Is provided. Also, the jackpot based on the lottery shown in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery shown in the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is increased, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is set so that it is easy to shift to a gaming state in which it is easy to win a big hit with a large number of balls that can be acquired by a big hit game.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous than the normal game for the player, and a probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (to make it easier to enter the probability variation state 1), and the player can easily experience a game state (probability variation state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. This makes it easy to experience the effects executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game or the probability change state, and to make the game enjoyable, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability change state 2 In addition, it is possible to provide a player with a sense of superiority to the probabilistic state 2 and improve the interest of the game for the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2 in the time-short state as well as the above-described certainty change state. Game state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (the ball is easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal gaming state) Easy gaming state) is set. Further, the time-short state 1 is configured such that the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is substantially executed, and the time-short state 2 is configured so that the lottery shown in FIG. 2 is substantially executed. This is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player.

  A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation state and the time reduction state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time reduction state.

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to a probabilistic state or a short-time state after the jackpot game ends, a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) targeting the right region of the game board 13 (the right region of the variable display unit 80) Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched into the right area of the game board 13 collides with the rubber rubber 69 and close to the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. An electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution prize winning device 700, and a ball can enter the distribution prize winning device 700 when the electric prize 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is in an open state when the result of the normal symbol lottery (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 is successful. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700 is different.

  Although the detailed description is the same as that of FIG. 81 of the fourth embodiment described above, a description thereof will be omitted. When the electric winnings 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 are opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (The time until the ball that entered the prize-winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is about 0.4 seconds). The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on winning in the win (per win) as a result of the general drawing lottery, and the first operation depends on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow down. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates for 1.5 seconds after the winning of the normal drawing until 3.5 seconds have passed (2 seconds). Thus, the switching valve 702 is operated, and the first flow path 703 is operated in other periods.

  A first working port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow path 703, while a second working port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow path 706, The ball that has flowed down enters one of the operation ports. Here, returning to FIG. 133, the first working port 704 and the second working port 707 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the first operating port 704 is connected by a first operating mechanism 645 a provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 and a first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. When the sphere depresses the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first operation mechanism 705 is pushed up and the first contact piece is pushed up. The first working combination 645a comes into contact with the working combination 645a and is opened.

  Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 can enter the ball. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed in the same manner as the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball enters the other end of the first operating mechanism 705. By pressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first working combination 645a is closed.

  As described above, a mechanism for changing an accessory into an open state or a closed state by movement of a sphere without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-electrical accessory. In the present embodiment, a detailed description of the configuration of the non-electrically-powered article has been omitted, but any technique that has already been disclosed may be adopted as appropriate.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting and winning device 700 and entered the second operation port 707 is activated by the operation of the second operation mechanism 708 in the same manner as the above-described configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory. 2 Open the working combination 645b. When the second working combination 645b is opened, a ball enters the right second entrance 64b that can enter the ball, and the lottery of FIG. 2 set more advantageous than FIG. 1 is performed. Executed. In addition, about the structure of the non-electrically-powered object comprised from the 2nd action port 707, the 2nd action mechanism 708, and the 2nd action member 645b, the 1st action port 704 mentioned above, the 1st action mechanism 705, and the 1st Since it is the same as the structure of the non-electrically-powered object comprised from the actuating object 645a, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is only provided for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds after the electrification of the changeover valve 702 has been won per ordinary figure until 3.5 seconds have elapsed (2 seconds). The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate in the other period (including the period not won per ordinary figure), and is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second working combination 645b, the special drawing 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. Because.

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description of the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b can enter the ball by entering the distribution winning device 700, the game board 13 is not entered without entering the distribution winning device 700. A sphere that has flowed down the right region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters any entrance that is ready to enter.

  Thus, in the gaming state (probability change state or short time state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the special drawing lottery (the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal gaming state. ing.

  In the distribution winning device 700, a switching valve 702 is provided for distributing the ball that has entered the ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path is communicated for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed after winning the normal figure. In the operation control of the switching valve 702, a constant operation is performed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

  Next, the flow of a ball entering the distribution prize winning device 700 for each electric role release pattern will be described. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period during which a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 is one second from the start of the game. The ball that has entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the first flow path 1644 communicates, so that the ball is guided to the first flow path 1644. As described above, while the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operation port 704. In effect, the ball enters the right first entrance 64a2. That is, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination), a gaming state (time reduction state 1, probability variation state 1) in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates in the time shortening state or the probability variation state. Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric combination 701 is released for 0.1 second after 1.5 seconds have passed after the big win, but the opening for 0.1 second is difficult for the ball to enter. And almost no ball enters. If a ball enters the distribution prize device 700 during this period, the ball enters the distribution prize device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

  Next, when the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern, the period during which the ball can enter the allocation winning device 700 is 1 second after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. . The ball that has entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed as described above. At the timing when the sphere reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the second flow path 706 communicates, so that the sphere is guided to the second flow path 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is guided to the second flow path 706 and enters the second operation port 707. By acting on the ball, the ball can enter the right second entrance 64b. That is, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination), the gaming state (the time reduction state 2, the probability change state 2) in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates in the time reduction state or the probability change state. Will be set. In the opening pattern B, after winning the jackpot, the electric accessory 701 is released for 0.1 second. However, the opening for 0.1 second is a difficult interval for the ball to enter, and almost the ball has entered. There is no ball. If a ball enters the distribution prize winning device 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution prize winning device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern A described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the balls that have entered the opening pattern B are reliably controlled so that the balls that have entered the opening pattern A are reliably guided to the first flow path 703. In order to be guided to the second flow path 706, the operation is executed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701. This makes it possible to guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball is moved from the distribution winning device 700 during the operation of the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the usual fluctuation time is shortened (time reduction state, probability variation state), the usual fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, in the state where the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, the switching valve 702 is started from the start of the normal drawing in order to surely guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to the second flow path. Even if the second flow path is placed in communication for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the first flow path remains in communication until the game is executed again after the next normal change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 across multiple games per multi-purpose game is guided to an unintended flow path.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the set electric combination (electric combination) Based on this, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially varies and a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially varies. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery (the number of balls that can be earned by the jackpot game is substantially larger. Is set to be given a high ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed.

  As a result, the short-time state and the probable change state are further advantageous to the player (the short-time state 2 and the probable state 2), which are more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time reduction state 1, probability variation state 1) that is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, by setting a high transition rate for shifting from the normal game state to the time-short state 1 or the probability variation state 1, the player can easily see the effects executed in the time-short state or the probability variation state. Or by setting a low transition rate to shift to the probability variation state 2 that is the most advantageous game state for the player, giving a superiority to the player transitioning to the probability variation state 2 By doing so, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

  In the fifth embodiment, two types of opening pattern A and opening pattern B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component), but the type of the opening pattern is not limited to this. Three or more types may be settable. This makes it possible to set more various gaming states.

  In the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening for guiding the sphere to the second flow path 706 are used as an opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component). A pattern (open pattern B) is set. For example, an open pattern in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the sphere is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided. Also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which channel (the first channel 703 or the second channel 706) the ball that has entered the electric accessory 701 is guided to, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is configured to enter any of the operation ports (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707). An outflow that communicates with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without providing a flow path that is discharged again from the distribution prize winning device 700 to the game board 13 or entering each operation port. A flow path for entering the mouth may be provided. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution prize winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation after the winning game is executed. For example, the switching valve 702 always performs a constant operation after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It may be configured such that the flow path that communicates is switched when the number of balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  In the fifth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). For example, the switching valve 702 that is a switching member is operated when a ball abuts, and a predetermined condition (for example, It may be configured such that the flow path communicating is switched when 10 balls pass).

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the sphere guided to any flow path by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any working port. A distribution member that distributes the sphere guided to one of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere distributed to the specific flow path by the distribution member enters the corresponding operation port. May be.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As means for varying (extending) the time for a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set to a period. A plurality of different paths may be provided, and distribution means for distributing the balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 700 to any one of the paths may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who can play a game while predicting at which timing a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702 from getting bored of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the transition of the gaming state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 95, this pachinko machine 10 wins the normal gaming state, the probability variation state 1 (disadvantage variation), the probability variation state 2 (advantage variation), the time-short state 1 (disadvantage short time), and the time-short state 2 (short advantage time). It is configured to shift based on the jackpot type.

  First, in the normal game state, a game is executed in which the fluctuations in FIG. 1 are executed. When winning a jackpot, 50% shifts to probability variation state 1, 30% transitions to probability variation state 2, and 15% shortens state 1 And 5% shift to the time reduction state 2.

  Next, in the probability variation state 1, since the release pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern, a game is executed in which the variation of FIG. In the probability variation state 1, when winning a big hit, the probability variation state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% transitions to the probability variation state 2, 15% transitions to the time reduction state 1, and 5% transitions to the time reduction state 2. As described above, the probability variation state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates in the same manner as the normal gaming state, so that the game after winning the jackpot is different, although the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal gaming state. The state transition destination and its distribution are the same.

  In the probability variation state 2, since the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the special variation of the special figure 2). In the probability variation state 2, when winning the jackpot, the probability variation state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% transitions to the time reduction state 2, and 5% transitions to the time reduction state 1. In this way, the probability variation state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 is substantially varied, and is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal gaming state, so that the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player It becomes.

  Next, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern in the time reduction state 1, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the special fluctuation of the special figure 1). In the time-saving state 1, when winning the jackpot, 50% shifts to the probability variation state 1, 30% transitions to the probability variation state 2, 15% loops the time-shortening state 1, and 5% transitions to the time-shortening state 2. As described above, the time-short state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates in the same way as the normal gaming state, so the fluctuation time of the special figure and the usual figure is shortened, and Although the release pattern differs from the normal game state, the game state transition destination after the big win and the distribution thereof are the same.

  In the short-time state 2, since the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the special fluctuation of the special figure 2). In the time-saving state 2, when winning the jackpot, 80% shifts to the probability variation state 2, 15% loops the time-saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time-shortening state 1. In this way, the time-short state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the probability of transition to the probability variation state 2 that is most advantageous to the player when winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state. The gaming state is set to 2.5 times or more (so-called pullback zone). By providing such a gaming state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will shift to the most advantageous gaming state (probability variation state 2) over the normal gaming state, and to enthusiastically play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, what is necessary is just to set suitably about the game state transfer destination and transfer distribution rate after jackpot in each game state set in this 5th Embodiment, without restricting to this. For example, the short time state for shifting from the normal gaming state may be only the short time state 2. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of a player who has not been able to shift to the probable change state despite winning the jackpot in the normal game state.

  In the fifth embodiment, the game state transition destination and the distribution ratio are unified according to the type of the special figure regardless of the game state. However, the game state is not limited to this and the game state is not limited to this. The migration destination and the migration distribution rate may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game play, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored at an early stage.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot, and the time reduction state is configured to be given 10 time reductions regardless of the gaming state. It is a specification that continues until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special figure fluctuates. You may make it the structure which transfers. In this case, for example, a probability variation state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable probability variation state include, for example, a difference in the number of fluctuations of a special symbol at which the probability variation state ends, or a different lottery probability for shifting from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. You may make it do.

<About the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 95, the fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the accessory motor 270 is deleted.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, There is a symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, a jackpot flag 203i, a probability variation flag 203r, a hour / medium counter 203r, an electric utility release pattern storage area 203y, and another memory area 203z. doing.

  Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, Normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol reserved ball number counter Since 203f, jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203r, and other memory area 203z are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the hour / middle counter 203r is the same as that provided in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment or the fourth embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The electric utility release pattern storage area 203y is an area for storing the electric utility release pattern stored in the electric utility release pattern table 202de. The electric combination 701 is moved based on the electric combination release pattern stored in the electric combination release pattern storage area 203y.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and an electric utility release pattern table 202de. ing. The tables other than the first hit type selection table 202b and the electric utility release pattern table 202de are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Although not shown in the figure, the electric utility release pattern table 202de is a storage area in which an operation pattern (electric utility release pattern) for moving the electric utility item 701 is stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 constituting the first hit type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 98B is a diagram showing details of the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 that is referred to when the first special symbol is a lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 of the present embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the big hit type is “big hit A”. Are associated. This “jackpot A” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four, a probability variation state is given after the jackpot, and the release pattern A is set as the electric utility release pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, “big hit B” is associated as the big hit type. This “jackpot B” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is four, a probability variation state is given after the jackpot, and the release pattern B is set as the electric utility release pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 94”, “big hit C” is associated as the big hit type. This “jackpot C” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4 and only the short-time state is given 10 times after the jackpot, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric utility opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated as the big hit type. This “jackpot D” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4 and only the short-time state is given 10 times after the jackpot, and the release pattern B is set as the electric utility release pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 that is referred to when the first special symbol is a lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 of this embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 74”, the big hit type is “big hit E”. Are associated. This “big hit E” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, a probability variation state is given after the big hit, and the release pattern B is set as the electric utility release pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 79”, “big hit F” is associated as the big hit type. The “big hit F” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two, a probability variation state is given after the big hit, and the release pattern B is set as the electric utility release pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 84”, “big hit C” is associated as the big hit type. When “Big Jack C” is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is 4 rounds, and only 7 time-short states are given after the big win, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated as the big hit type. When the “special jackpot D” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is four rounds, and only the short-time state of seven times is given after the jackpot, which is a jackpot in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 99 to 100.

  First, with reference to FIG. 99, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 (S164) performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 5 (S164). This special symbol variation process 4 (S164) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the fourth embodiment, and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37. Or a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special symbol variation process 5 (S164) in the fifth embodiment does not execute the subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203g in comparison with the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that an open pattern storage area is set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (S164), the processing from S201 to S217 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86). If it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S218), and the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the round counter. Set (S281), and set the round start flag to ON (S282). Then, the start of jackpot is set (S220), the hour / minute counter 203r is reset to 0 (S283), the electric utility release pattern storage area 203y is cleared (S284), and the process proceeds to S222.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is greater than 0 (S272). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S213), and the process proceeds to S282.

  In the process of S272, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 0 (S272: No), the electric utility release pattern A is stored in the electric utility release pattern storage area 203y (S285). Exit. As described above, in the case of the electric role release pattern A, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is guided to the first operation port 704. That is, the game ball enters the right first entrance 64a2 and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process 5 (FIG. 100, S208) in this 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing 5 (S208). This special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208) is a variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state in contrast to the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the variation pattern is selected based on the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the special symbol 2 variation start process 5 (S208), the processing from S301 to S305 is executed as in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14) in the fourth embodiment. In the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S305: No), the display mode of out is set (S308), and it is out based on the variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state. A variation pattern is determined (S381), and the process proceeds to S310.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined based on the out (normal) variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the gaming state is the short time state, the variation pattern is determined based on a variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the short time state. Thereby, the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state can be set.

  Next, the details of the special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (FIG. 101, S213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 variation start processing 5 (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process 5 (S213) is a variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state in contrast to the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the variation pattern is selected based on the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, detailed description thereof is omitted, and the differences are also similar to the above-described special symbol 2 variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 100). Detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, details of the prefetch process 5 (S513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S513). Of the prefetch process 5 (see FIG. 102), the same processes as the prefetch process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment are executed in the processes of S601 and S672.

  In the prefetch process 5 (see FIG. 102) of the fifth embodiment, when S672 ends, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S681), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination value (“0”) at the low probability (normal game state) is included in the jackpot determination value (“0 to 9”) at the high probability (probability game state). Therefore, even if the lottery result is prefetched in the normal gaming state and then the probability changing gaming state is shifted, the problem that the lottery result changes can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 5 (S106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, and the second symbol variation display or the like performed in the second symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 701 associated with the passage port 701a.

  Of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 103), the processing in S701 to S713 and S718 to S725 is respectively S701 to S713 and S718 in the ordinary symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment. The same processing as each processing of ~ S725 is executed.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103), when the process of S713 is completed, an opening pattern of the electric utility item 701 is then set based on the opening pattern stored in the electric role opening pattern storage area 203y. (S781), and the process proceeds to S719. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103) of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, the operation of the switching valve is set and the process ends (S782).

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 (S1105). The jackpot control process 5 (S1105) is a process for performing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special jackpot state. is there.

  In the jackpot control process 5, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), it is not necessary to perform the big hit control, and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether the round start flag is on (S1381). The mouth (large open mouth) 65a is opened (S1382), the round start flag is set to OFF (S1383), a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1384), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round start flag is OFF in the process of S1381 (S1381: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening is satisfied (S1385), and if it is satisfied (S1385: Yes), The large opening is closed (S1386), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1387), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large opening is not satisfied (S1385: No), it is determined whether the value of the round counter is 0 (S1388). If it is 0 (S1388: No), the round start flag is turned on. (S1389), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1388 that the value of the round counter is not 0 (S1388), the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S1390), and the power release pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is released. It is read from the pattern table 202de and stored in the electric utility release pattern storage area 203y (S1391). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1392), and if it is a probability variation jackpot (S1392: Yes), the probability variation flag 203r is set to ON (S1393), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1392 that it is a normal big hit (S1392: No), the probability variation flag 203r is set to off (S1394), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 that can be entered when winning in the normal drawing is selected by the switching valve 702, or the first flow path 703 or The ball is distributed to any one of the second flow paths 706 and enters either the first working port 704 or the second working port 707. When a ball enters each of the operating ports (704, 707), the corresponding operating combination (645a, 645b) is opened. When the first working combination 645a is opened, the right first entrance 64a2 can enter, and when the second working combination 645b is opened, the right second entrance 64b can enter. It becomes.

  An opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a ball to the first flow path 703 as an opening pattern of the slide member (electric role) 710 of the sorting prize winning device 700 depending on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot by a special drawing lottery. And an open pattern (open pattern B) for guiding the sphere to the second flow path 706 is set. That is, the game state in which the special figure 1 substantially varies and the game state in which the special figure 2 substantially varies are set based on the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component) set based on the jackpot type. be able to. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery (the number of balls that can be earned by the jackpot game is substantially larger. Is set to be given a high ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed.

  As a result, the short-time state and the probable change state are further advantageous to the player (the short-time state 2 and the probable state 2), which are more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time reduction state 1, probability variation state 1) that is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, two types of opening pattern A and opening pattern B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component), but the type of the opening pattern is not limited to this. Three or more types may be settable. This makes it possible to set more various gaming states.

  In the fifth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening for guiding the sphere to the second flow path 706 are used as an opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component). A pattern (open pattern B) is set. For example, an open pattern in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the sphere is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided. Also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which channel (the first channel 703 or the second channel 706) the ball that has entered the electric accessory 701 is guided to, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment, the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above is used. In the fourth embodiment described above, a large amount of game value is given by entering a game ball into the specific prize opening 650a provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 in the case of a big hit (one ball The payout game state is given by passing the ball through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 which is opened in a part of the jackpot period. The pachinko machine 10 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, a special winning lot 65a provided in the variable winning device 65 is provided in the variable winning device 65 when a special winning lottery result is provided in addition to the big winning symbol. The opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be opened and closed. Further, a specific winning opening 650a different from the variable winning device 65a is provided, and the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed when a big hit is made. Hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 that allows a game ball to enter when a small hit is made is referred to as a first variable winning device 65, and the specific winning opening 65a provided in the first variable winning device 65 is the first. It will be called a specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the variable winning device 650 that allows a game ball to enter when a big hit is obtained is referred to as a second variable winning device 650, and the specific winning port 650 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is second specified. It will be referred to as a winning opening 650.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a passes the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65, so that a probability variation gaming state is given.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 is referred to as a jackpot switch 65e3, and the jackpot is awarded based on the passing of the game ball through the jackpot switch 65e3. Configured.

  As a result, in the case of a small win, the game ball can enter the variable winning device 65, and when the game ball passes through the big win switch 65e3, the big win is given. Therefore, even if it is a small hit, there is a possibility that a big hit will be given thereafter, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, characteristic playability in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, there are two types of triggers for executing the jackpot game, and one is a jackpot executed by winning a jackpot by drawing a special symbol. Is a jackpot executed by the ball passing through the jackpot switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the bonus game when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

  In this way, a pachinko that has a game where a jackpot game is executed by two kinds of triggers, such as a lottery result of a special symbol and a ball passing through a specific area (big hit switch 65e3) within a specific period (small hit period). The machine 10 is called 1 type 2 type mixing machine.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has a gaming state (a so-called probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state)) in which the special symbol jackpot probability or the normal symbol hit probability is higher than usual. After the jackpot game is over, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the ordinary figure is shortened, and further, when the winning figure is won as a result of the lottery drawing, When the opening pattern is changed, a short game state (hereinafter referred to as a short time state) is given.

  In the type 1 and type 2 mixer configured in this way, for example, the special hit probability is set to be higher in special figure 2 without changing the big hit probability between special figure 1 and special figure 2. By making it easier for the drawing of FIG. 2 to be performed during the short-time state, the jackpot probability during the short-time state can be set higher than in the normal game. Furthermore, by making the opening pattern of the electric charge (electric role) 701 in the short-time state easier to enter the sorting prize winning device 700 than in the normal game, the jackpot game is further executed. The probability can be increased.

  In addition, the opening pattern of the specific door 65f1 is changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when winning a small hit (the ratio of the advantageous opening pattern among the predetermined opening patterns is selected as the special figure 2). In this case, it is possible to set the probability that the big hit game in the short time state is executed higher than the normal game state.

  Similar to the above-described fourth embodiment, the first time-short state in which the variation of FIG. 1 is substantially executed and the variation of FIG. The second short time state is set corresponding to the jackpot type at the jackpot time. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the details will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b), but the jackpot game won by the lottery of the special figure 2 than the special figure 1 is advantageous for the player. A game (a jackpot game with a large number of balls that a player can acquire during the jackpot game) is executed. This makes it possible to set a more advantageous state (second time-short state) and a disadvantageous state (first time-short state) in the time-short state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of stages of game states (normal game state, first short time state, second short time state) according to the degree of advantage for the player in the game state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the user from getting bored early.

  In addition, about the structure in the allocation prize-winning apparatus 700 and the mechanism in which the 1st action | working agent 645a and the 2nd operation | working agent 645b operate | move are the same as 4th Embodiment mentioned above, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has been described above, but whether or not the game ball passes through the jackpot switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 (whether or not it is easy to pass) is determined as a specific prize. The opening / closing door 65f1 of the opening 65a may be varied depending on the opening pattern.

  For example, when “small hit A” is selected, the door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 1 during the small hit game as an open pattern in which the game ball is easy to win the first variable winning device 65. Set an open scenario to open for 5 seconds. On the other hand, when “small hit B” is selected, the ball (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 0. 0 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the ball is difficult to win the first variable winning device 65. What is necessary is just to set the open scenario in which the operation | movement to open for 1 second is performed 3 times.

  In this way, by changing the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 65f in the small hit game according to each small hit type, the small hit and disadvantage that is advantageous to the player for the small hit game that opens the first variable winning device 650 It is possible to set a small hit and provide a variety of playability.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a bonus after the jackpot game, a time-short game state is given according to the jackpot type, but even if another bonus is given as a privilege given after the jackpot game For example, a high probability state in which the big hit probability or the small hit probability of a special symbol is set higher than the normal gaming state may be given for a predetermined period. In this case, the predetermined period includes a period until winning the next jackpot, a period until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and a transition to the normal gaming state with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). The period until the lottery is performed and the lottery is won can be considered. In addition, as other benefits, a privilege that increases the probability of winning a normal symbol over the normal gaming state, and the opening pattern of each winning device that is executed in the big hit game or the small hit game is changed to an open pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits can be considered.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 119, an electrical configuration according to the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment.

  In the first hit random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), a jackpot determination value is defined corresponding to the symbol type and the value of the first hit random number counter C1. Specifically, when the symbol type is Special Figure 1, it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 is “0”, and it is determined to be a big hit, and other values are determined to be off.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is special figure 2, when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is “0”, it is determined to be a big hit, and small when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is “1 to 399”. It is determined to be a hit. Thus, the special figure 1 is not determined to be a small hit, and the special figure 2 is not determined to be out of place.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values of the first jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 as the big hit A determination value corresponding to FIG. “50 to 99” is set as the determination value. Corresponding to FIG. 2, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the jackpot C, and “50-99” is set as the determination value of the jackpot D. Note that the jackpot C and jackpot D will be described later in detail, but are also referred to when the jackpot type is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed when the ball passes the jackpot switch 65e3.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the big hit game is started, the opening / closing 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large number of winning balls are obtained by entering the gaming balls into the first specific winning opening 65a. A game to be executed is executed. In addition, a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game ends according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 4 rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the time-short state 1 (electric role release pattern A is set) (Short time state) is applied until the special figure changes 100 times (short time 100 times).

  When the jackpot B is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the time-short state 2 (electric role release pattern B is set) (Short time state) is applied until the special figure changes 100 times (short time 100 times).

  When the jackpot C is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the time-short state 1 (electric role release pattern A is set) (Short time state) is applied until the special figure changes 100 times (short time 100 times).

  When the jackpot D is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the time-short state 2 (electric role release pattern B is set) (Short time state) is applied until the special figure changes 100 times (short time 100 times).

  Next, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is “5 to 204”, it is determined to be winning.

  An open pattern A and an open pattern B are set in the electric role open pattern table 202ea as in the above-described fourth embodiment. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the first small hit type selection table 202eb will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106 (d), the first small hit type selection table 202eb is a table in which the relationship between the value of the first hit type counter value C2 and the selected small hit is specified.

  Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79”, the small hit A is selected. This small hit A has one round, the attacker (first specific winning opening 65a) has an open time of 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes the jackpot By passing through the switch 65e3, a big hit C is given.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the small hit B is selected. This small hit B has one round, the attacker (first specific winning opening 65a) has an open time of 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes the jackpot By passing through the switch 65e3, it is a small hit to which a big hit D is given.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 116, the control process of the main control apparatus 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described while being different from the control process of the main control apparatus 110 according to the fourth embodiment described above. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above, a process capable of giving a probability variation state is executed, but the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment does not have a probability variation state, and the hit type of the special figure The difference is that a small hit is added and a control related to the small hit is added.

  Specifically, the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 107) is executed instead of the special symbol variation processing 4, and the normal symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 108) is performed instead of the normal symbol variation processing. In the main process (see FIG. 110), the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the big hit control process 4, and the small hit control process (see FIG. 113) is added. Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. The special symbol variation process 6 in the sixth embodiment is different from the special symbol variation process 4 in the fourth embodiment in that the processes from S291 to S296 are added and a part of the process is deleted. Yes. About the other process, since the same process as 4th Embodiment is performed, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the special symbol variation process 6 is executed, the processing of S201 to S217 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process 4. If it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery is a big hit (S217: Yes), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S241), the big win flag 203i is set to ON (S220), and the hour and middle counter 203u is reset to 0 (S292), and the process proceeds to S222.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S217: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a big hit (S293). When it is determined in the process of S293 that the current lottery result is a small hit (S293: Yes), a small hit setting process is executed (S294). A detailed description of the small hit setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S294 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S293 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S293: No), next, as in the special symbol variation process 4, S272, S273 The process is executed. When the processing of S273 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203cr is 0 (S295). If it is determined that the value of the counter is 0 (S295: Yes), the electric utility release pattern is stored. The release pattern A is stored in the area 203ee, and the process proceeds to S282 described above. If it is determined in the process of S295 that the counter value is not 0, the process of S245 is skipped and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S282. Then, when the process ends in S282, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the small hit setting process (S294) will be described. When the small hit setting process is executed, first, the small hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table (S4501), and an open scenario is set based on the small hit type (S4502). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203ed is set on (S4503), and the small hit opening flag 203ec is set on. Then, the V hitting big hit type is set according to the small hit type (S4505), and this process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process 6 (S106) will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol variation processing 6 is different from the normal symbol variation processing 3 of the fourth embodiment described above in that the processing related to the high probability state (probability variation state) of the normal symbol is deleted and the details of the operation control are changed. In other respects, other configurations are the same. About the same location, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the normal symbol variation process 6 (S106) is executed, the processing from S701 to S707 is performed as in the normal symbol variation process 3. When the process of S707 is completed, a lottery result based on the random number table per ordinary symbol (second random number table) 202c is acquired (S791). With reference to the lottery result acquired in the process of S791, the processes of S712 to S715, S717, and S718 are executed as in the normal symbol variation process 3.

  If it is determined in step S715 that the special symbol is not a big hit (S715: No), then the opening time and number of times of the electric utility item are based on the table stored in the electric utility release pattern storage area 203ee. (S792). When the processing of S792 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current time is short (S719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203cr is greater than zero. If it is determined in the process of S719 that the current time is short (S719: Yes), the normal symbol change time is set to 3 seconds, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S719 that the current time is not short (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds (S721), and this process ends.

  Also, in the process of S702 executed in the normal symbol variation process 6 of FIG. 123, if it is determined that the normal symbol is currently varying (S702: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time has elapsed. (S722). If it is determined in step S722 that the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S722 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S722: Yes), the processes of S723 to S725 are executed similarly to the normal symbol fluctuation process 3, and the operation of the switching valve 702 is set ( S793), this process is terminated.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment does not have a probability changing function, the probability of hitting a normal map cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a large difference in the usual fluctuation time between the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state (the normal gaming state is 180 seconds and the short-time state is 3 seconds), and furthermore, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is changed. The game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the main process 6 performed in the main controller 110 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The main process 6 of the sixth embodiment is different from the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the big hit control process 3 are changed and a small hit control process (S1191) is added. Other configurations are the same. About the same location, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the main process 6 is executed, the processes of S1161 to S1165 are executed as in the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment. Note that the jackpot control process 5 is executed in the process of S1165, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1165 is completed, a small hit control process is then executed (S1191). The small hitting control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1191 ends, the processes from S1166 to S1176 are executed in the same manner as the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment, and this process ends.

  Next, the big hit control process 5 (S1165) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. When the jackpot control process 5 (S1165) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the opening flag 203v is on (S1391). If it is determined in the processing of S1391 that the opening flag 203v is on (S1391: Yes), then the opening flag 203v is set to off (S1392), an opening command is set (S1372), and the jackpot type is supported. An opening pattern is set (S1393), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1391 that the opening flag is not on (S1391: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203eb is on (S1301). If it is determined in S1301 that the jackpot flag is not on (S1301: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203eb is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S1394). If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S1394: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON in order to open the second variable winning device 650 (S1395), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1394, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1394: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1378), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. In the case (S1378: Yes), the ending process 6 is executed (S1379). When it is determined in S1378 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: No), or when the process of S1379 is ended, this process is ended.

  Next, the ending process 6 will be described with reference to FIG. In this ending process, as shown in FIG. 112, the processes of S4101 to S4195 are executed, and a gaming state (whether or not a short time state is given) given after the jackpot is finished, and a release pattern of the electric role are set.

  Specifically, it is discriminated based on the specified contents set corresponding to each jackpot type in the first jackpot type selection table 202b. For example, when the jackpot of this time is jackpot A in FIG. Is set to 100 (S4193), and pattern A is set as the electric utility release pattern (S4194).

  As described above, the power-release pattern in the short-time state and the short-time state can be set based on the specified contents (presence / absence of time, power-release pattern) set in correspondence with the jackpot type. It is possible to easily set the time reduction state 1 or the time reduction state 2 during the time reduction state.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S1191) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. This small hitting control process (S1191) is a process for controlling from the small hitting start to the small hitting end, and in particular, the ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 during the small hitting. There is a feature in the control for giving the big hit game given to the end of the small hit game.

  When the small hit control process (S1191) is executed, the processes of S4601 to S4611 are executed as shown in FIG. 113, and thereafter, the same process as the abnormal process 4 executed in the fourth embodiment is executed. . In detail, the same processing as S1061 to S1670 shown in FIG. 89 is executed, and instead of the processing of S1671, the winning number counter 203t2 and the discharging number counter 203t8 are reset and this processing ends.

  In the above-described small hitting control process (S1191), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened at a predetermined timing (for example, 0.2 seconds after the small hitting is started) (S4605 and S4606). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened (for example, as a period necessary for the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 to reach the flow path switching member 65h, a small hit is started. 0.5 seconds after that), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON to operate the flow path switching member 65h provided in the first variable prize winning device 65 to switch the flow path (S4607 to S4608). .

  As described above, by performing operation control of various devices (opening / closing door 65f1 and flow path switching member 65h) executed during small hitting by a series of controls, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors in the operation timing of various devices. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate small hit game. The various operation controls executed in this small hit control are defined in one release scenario, and the release scenario is updated by a counter that is counted at a constant cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds). You may comprise so that various operation control may be performed based on the content. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce an error in timing at which various operation controls are executed.

  Next, the small winning prize process (S4611) executed in the small hit control process (S1191) described above will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit winning process (S4611) is to execute various processes based on the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit period. For specific contents, the same process as the winning process 3 (S1270 in FIG. 88) executed in the above-described fourth embodiment is executed. The difference between the small winning prize process (S4611) and the winning process 3 (S1270) is that in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the big hit game and is provided in the first variable winning device 65. In the sixth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the small hit, and the first variation winning device 65 is opened in the sixth embodiment, whereas the probability variation is given by passing the ball through the certain probability variation switch 65e3. Since the jackpot is given by passing the ball through the jackpot switch 65e3, which is a specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, the names of various components are changed as shown in FIG. is there.

  When the small winning prize process S4611 is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4721 are executed as shown in FIG.

  Next, the V passing jackpot setting process (S4711) will be described with reference to FIG. When the V passing jackpot setting process (S4711) is executed, first, the jackpot type is determined based on the V passing jackpot type value Β1 (S4801), and then an open scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S4802). . As a result, the big hit is executed after the small hit ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the small winning prize completion processing (S4721) will be described. When the small win winning completion process (S4721) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit setting flag 203β2 is ON (S4901). If it is determined in S4901 that the jackpot setting flag 203β2 is on (S4901: Yes), then the jackpot flag 203eb is set on (S4902), and the opening flag 203v is set on (S4903). , The process proceeds to S4904.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the big hit setting flag 203β2 is set to OFF, the process proceeds to S4904. In step S4904, the V hit jackpot type value is cleared, and the process ends.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. In 4th Embodiment mentioned above, it was set as the structure which provides the several time-short state from which the advantageous degree for a player differs as a time-short state provided when it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot is big, it is difficult to select a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player, and when the jackpot is big, it is easy to select the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player when the jackpot is short (2) Probability change state 2) was provided. By diversifying the game state by these plural time-short states, the player's interest has been improved.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, not only the advantageous degree of the short time state is varied, but also the short time period of the short time state given according to the gaming state in the case of a big hit is made different. Thereby, since the degree of expectation as to whether or not the short time period continues for a long time can be varied depending on the gaming state, it is possible to predict the short time period to be given in consideration of the gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. And the partial process performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 is a point changed from the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment, a time reduction number selection table 202h is provided. The short time selection table 202h is a data table for selecting a short time according to the gaming state as a short time state of a normal symbol set after the big jackpot when a special symbol is a big jackpot. The short time selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b).

  FIG. 117B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction number selection table 202h. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), the time reduction number selection table 202h defines the time reduction period of normal symbols given after jackpots in association with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Specifically, when the winning jackpot is either jackpot A or B, and the gaming state at the time of winning is a normal state (non-probable non-short-time state), 50 times are set as the short-term period. That is, in the case of jackpot A, 50 time-short states 1 are set after the jackpot is ended, and basically, the probability variation state of a special symbol is imparted 100 times (if it passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot). Is done. In other words, the probability variation state 1 is 50 times after the jackpot A is finished, and the probability variation non-short-time state (latent probability variation state) is between 51 times and 100 times. When the latent probability change state is reached, it is difficult to hit a normal symbol, so the number of holding balls tends to decrease. Therefore, since it is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state 1, it is possible for the player to play the game in the hope that it will be a big hit again during the probability variation state 1. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the game. Further, in the case of jackpot B, the short time state 2 of 50 times is set after the jackpot is ended, and basically, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given 100 times (if it passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot). The In other words, after the jackpot B is completed, the probability variation state 2 is performed 50 times, and the probability variation non-short-time state (latent probability variation state) is achieved 51 to 100 times. In the latent probability changing state, it is difficult to hit a normal symbol, and even if it is hit, an opening pattern A is set (an opening pattern that is easy to enter the first operating port 704). It is disadvantageous compared to 2. Therefore, a greater sense of tension can be given to 1 to 50 games after the end of jackpot B.

  When the jackpot A or jackpot B is won in the latent probability change state (probability non-short-time state), the time-short state is given 100 times. That is, when jackpot A, the probability variation state 1 is basically given 100 times, and when jackpot B is reached, the probability variation state 2 is basically granted 100 times. Therefore, since it does not switch to the latent probability changing state, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a long and short period is selected in the latent probability changing state, the disappointment of switching from the probability changing state 1 or the probability changing state 2 to the latent probability changing state is reduced, and the big hit A or big hit in the latent probability changing state You can make B want to win. Therefore, the motivation for the player's game in the latent probability changing state can be improved.

  If the jackpot A or jackpot B is won in the time-short state 1 or the time-short state 2 (non-probable time-short state), the time-short state is given 30 times. Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, after the probability variation state 1 of 30 times, it switches to the latent probability variation state of 70 times. Further, in the case of big hit B, after the probability variation state 2 of 30 times, it switches to the latent probability variation state of 70 times.

  If the jackpot A or jackpot B is won in the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2 (probability variation short state), the time shortening state is given 20 times. Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, after the probability variation state 1 of 20 times, it switches to the latent probability variation state of 80 times. In the case of big hit B, after 20 probability change states 2, it switches to 80 latent probability change states.

  In addition, even when the jackpots C and D are won, the number of time reductions is varied according to the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the jackpot C or D is reached in the normal state (non-probability change non-short-time state), 100 short-time periods are given. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C, the time reduction state 1 is assigned 100 times, and in the case of jackpot D, the time reduction state 2 is assigned 100 times. The reason for setting a relatively short time period in the normal state is to prevent an excessive disadvantage for the player. In other words, in a normal state that is most disadvantageous for the player, if the probabilistic state is not granted, and if it is shortened to a shorter time period, the player's motivation for the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it can prevent that a player's motivation falls by setting a comparatively long time-short period.

  Similarly, when the jackpot C, D is won in the latent probability variation state (probability variation non-short-time state), the short-term period is not given. That is, it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. As described above, when the jackpot is A or B in the latent probability changing state, a relatively long (100 times) short time period is selected. On the other hand, in jackpot C and D, since it will shift to the most disadvantageous normal state, in the latent probability variation state, the player's degree of advantage greatly differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the latent probability changing state, it is possible to pay more attention to the big hit type. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, when the jackpot C or D is reached in the time reduction state 1 or the time reduction state 2, 30 time reduction periods are given. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C, the time reduction state 1 is given 30 times, and in the case of jackpot D, the time reduction state 2 is given 30 times. Further, when the jackpot C or D is reached in the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2, ten short time periods are given. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C, the time-short state 1 is given 10 times, and in the case of jackpot D, the time-short state 2 is given 10 times.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is F to H (a jackpot by lottery of the second special symbol), the same short time period is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the jackpot is E or F, 100 short time periods are given regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is G or H, 20 short time periods are given regardless of the gaming state.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which varies the short time period provided according to the gaming state in the time of a big hit. By comprising in this way, the jackpot which wants to win according to a game state can be varied. That is, since the degree of advantage of each jackpot can be varied according to the gaming state, more various gaming properties can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, a winning state storage area 203γ is provided. The winning state storage area 203γ is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot at the start of the jackpot. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when a short time period is set at the end of the jackpot. That is, at the end of the jackpot, the number of hours and hours corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is read from the time and number of times selection table 202h described above, and the value of the hour and middle counter 203cr is obtained. Is set. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. First, with reference to FIG. 119, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 7 (refer FIG. 119) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. This special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

  Among the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119), the processes in S201 to S273 are the same as the respective processes in S201 to S273 of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) in the fourth embodiment. Executed. Further, in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) in the present embodiment, when the process of S218 is completed, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined and information corresponding to the winning state storage area 203γ is stored. Is executed (S299), and the processing after S220 is executed. Details of the winning state determination process (S299) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a winning state determination process (S299). When the winning state determination process (see FIG. 120) is started, first, the values of the probability variation counter 203ce and the hour / counter counter 203cr are read (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read probability change counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002). If it is determined that the value is 0 (not a sure change state) (S5002: No), then the read time is shortened. It is determined whether the value of the middle counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5003).

  In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203cr is 0 (not the time-short state) (S5003: No), it is determined that the game state is a normal state (non-probable change non-time-short state) Therefore, “00H”, which is a value indicating the non-probability non-short-time state, is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203cr is larger than 0 (S5003: Yes), it is a big hit in either the time-short state 1 or the time-short state 2 (non-probable time-short state). Since it means winning, “01H”, which is a value indicating the short-term state of uncertain change, is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5005), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5006). If it is determined that it is 0 (not the short-time state) (S5006: No), it means that it is a big hit in the latent probability variation state (probability non-short-time state), so “02H” indicating the latent probability variation state is won The data is stored in the state storage area 203γ (S5007), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5006, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction / intermediate counter 203cr is greater than 0 (S5006: Yes), it means that either the probability variation state 1 or the probability variation state 2 is a big hit. “03H” indicating the short time state of probability change is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5008), and this process is terminated.

  At the end of the jackpot, the value stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is referred to determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the number of times saved is selected. As a result, various times and times can be realized according to the gaming state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the ending process 7 (S1379) will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process 7 (S1379) is a process executed in place of the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment. Like the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87), the jackpot ending and the jackpot This is a process for setting a later game state.

  When the ending process 7 (see FIG. 121) is started, first, an ending command for starting an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is set (S4101). Next, the jackpot end is set by setting off the jackpot flag 203ct (S4102). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203cf is on (S4103). If it is on (S4103: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ce is set to 100 (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105. To do. Thereby, the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set 100 times after the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203cf is OFF (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether the current jackpot is any of the jackpots A, C, E, or G (S4105). That is, it is determined whether it is a jackpot type to which the short-time state 1 is given after the jackpot, and when it is determined that it is one of the jackpots A, C, E, G (S4105: Yes), On the other hand, 0 is set (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4191. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4105 that none of the jackpots A, C, E, or G is any of the jackpots B, D, F, or H (S4105: No), the time reduction identification is performed. 1 is set to the flag 203cs (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4191.

  In the process of S4191 executed after the process of S4106 or S4107, the values stored in the time reduction number selection table 202h and the winning state storage area 203γ are read (S4191), and the read winning state storage area 203γ is stored. The number of time reductions indicated by the value and the current jackpot type is specified from the time reduction number selection table 202h (S4192). Then, the specified number of time reductions is set in the time reduction / intermediate counter 203cr (S4193), and this process ends.

  By executing this ending process, various time reduction times can be set according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, various times and times can be realized according to the gaming state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the degree of advantage is different between the case where the big win is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol and the case where the big win is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, 2 It is configured so that the player who wins the big win in the special symbol lottery will be advantageous to the player. Moreover, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which provides two types of time-short states, the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2, as the time-short state given after the end of jackpot. The short-time state 1 is a short-time state in which the first special symbol lottery is easily executed (the ball is easy to enter the right first entrance 64a2), and the short-time state 2 is the second special symbol lottery. Is easy to be executed (the ball is likely to enter the right second entrance 64b). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of time savings in the time saving state given after the end of the jackpot is made different depending on the gaming state. Thereby, since the degree of expectation as to whether or not the short time period continues for a long time can be varied depending on the gaming state, it is possible to predict the short time period to be given in consideration of the gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Note that all or a part of each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a view showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the allocation prize winning device 1640 is changed, the point where the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b. The difference is that the configuration for entering the ball is changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment executes a game (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) aiming at the first entrance 64a1 in a normal game state. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entrance of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won. In addition, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, the probability of winning a jackpot by a special drawing lottery after the jackpot game ends will be high, and the probability varying gaming state (hereinafter, the probable variation state) Although the probability of winning a jackpot does not change, a short-time gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a short-time state) that makes it easy to receive a special drawing lottery is given.

  Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of FIG. Is provided. Also, the jackpot based on the lottery shown in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery shown in the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is increased, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is set so that it is easy to shift to a gaming state in which it is easy to win a big hit with a large number of balls that can be acquired by a big hit game.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous than the normal game for the player, and a probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (to make it easier to enter the probability variation state 1), and the player can easily experience a game state (probability variation state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. This makes it easy to experience the effects executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game or the probability change state, and to make the game enjoyable, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability change state 2 In addition, it is possible to provide a player with a sense of superiority to the probabilistic state 2 and improve the interest of the game for the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2 in the time-short state as well as the above-described certainty change state. Game state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (the ball is easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal gaming state) Easy gaming state) is set. Further, the time-short state 1 is configured such that the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is substantially executed, and the time-short state 2 is configured so that the lottery shown in FIG. 2 is substantially executed. This is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player.

  A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation state and the time reduction state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time reduction state.

  Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to a probabilistic state or a short-time state after the jackpot game ends, a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) targeting the right region of the game board 13 (the right region of the variable display unit 80) Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched into the right area of the game board 13 collides with the rubber rubber 69 and close to the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. An electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution prize winning device 700, and a ball can enter the distribution prize winning device 700 when the electric prize 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is in an open state when the result of the normal symbol lottery (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 is successful. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700 is different.

  Although the detailed description is the same as that of FIG. 40 of the third embodiment described above, a description thereof will be omitted, but the configuration within the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric winnings 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 are opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (The time until the ball that entered the prize-winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is about 0.4 seconds). The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on winning in the win (per win) as a result of the general drawing lottery, and the first operation depends on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow down. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 44, the second flow path 706 is communicated between 1.5 seconds after the winning of the normal drawing and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds). Thus, the switching valve 702 is operated, and the first flow path 703 is operated in other periods.

  A first working port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow path 703, while a second working port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow path 706, The ball that has flowed down enters one of the operation ports. Here, returning to FIG. 122, the first working port 704 and the second working port 707 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the first operating port 704 is connected by a first operating mechanism 645 a provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 and a first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. When the sphere depresses the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first operation mechanism 705 is pushed up and the first contact piece is pushed up. The first working combination 645a comes into contact with the working combination 645a and is opened.

  Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 can enter the ball. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed in the same manner as the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball enters the other end of the first operating mechanism 705. By pressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first working combination 645a is closed.

  As described above, a mechanism for changing an accessory into an open state or a closed state by movement of a sphere without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-electrical accessory. In the present embodiment, a detailed description of the configuration of the non-electrically-powered article has been omitted, but any technique that has already been disclosed may be adopted as appropriate.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting and winning device 700 and entered the second operation port 707 is activated by the operation of the second operation mechanism 708 in the same manner as the above-described configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory. 2 Open the working combination 645b. When the second working combination 645b is opened, a ball enters the right second entrance 64b that can enter the ball, and the lottery of FIG. 2 set more advantageous than FIG. 1 is performed. Executed. In addition, about the structure of the non-electrically-powered object comprised from the 2nd action port 707, the 2nd action mechanism 708, and the 2nd action member 645b, the 1st action port 704 mentioned above, the 1st action mechanism 705, and the 1st Since it is the same as the structure of the non-electrically-powered object comprised from the actuating object 645a, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is only provided for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds after the electrification of the changeover valve 702 has been won per ordinary figure until 3.5 seconds have elapsed (2 seconds). The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate in the other period (including the period not won per ordinary figure), and is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second working combination 645b, the special drawing 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. Because.

  Returning to FIG. 122, the description of the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b can enter the ball by entering the distribution winning device 700, the game board 13 is not entered without entering the distribution winning device 700. A sphere that has flowed down the right region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters any entrance that is ready to enter.

  Thus, in the gaming state (probability change state or short time state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the special drawing lottery (the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal gaming state. ing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 123, the game board 13 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 123 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, there are provided three entrances through which a special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters. Specifically, a first entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 and a second right entrance of the right provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the front. 64b and a right first entrance 64a2 provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the right second entrance 64b.

  The first special entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are all subjected to the first special symbol lottery when the ball enters. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two types of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. It is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the first first winning combination 645a is attached to the right first entrance 64a2. The first actuating member 645a is in an open state in which a ball can enter the right first entrance 64a2 (easy) and cannot enter a ball into the right first entrance 64a2 ( It is variable to a closed state that becomes difficult. The first working combination 645a is switched to an open state when a ball enters a first working port 704 provided in the distribution winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first working combination 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  Similarly, a second actuating accessory 645b is attached to the right second entrance 64b. The second actuating member 645b is also in an open state in which a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b (easy), and a ball cannot enter the right second entrance 64b ( It is variable to a closed state which becomes difficult The second working combination 645b associated with the second working combination 645b is switched to an open state when a ball enters the second working port 707 provided in the distribution winning device 700. On the other hand, the second working combination 645b that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  An allocation winning device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. This distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered the ball into either the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first operation opening 704 (when entering the ball), the first working combination 645a associated with the right first entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entry A ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation opening 707 (if it enters the ball), the second working accessory 645b attached to the right second entry port is switched to the open state, and the right second entry port 64b is reached. And the ball is ready to enter.

  Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a front view of the distribution winning device 700. As shown in FIG. 124, the allocation prize winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 701 on the upper right side thereof. In the game board 13, the electric accessory 701 is embedded in the protruding position of the variable display device unit 80 protruding to the right-side flow path and the left wall surface of the flow path without protruding to the flow path. It can be switched to the buried position. When the electric accessory 701 is in the protruding position, only one sphere that has flowed down the flow path can be received and held on the upper part thereof. In addition, when the electric accessory 701 is switched from the protruding position to the buried position, the ball held on the upper part can flow into the distribution prize winning device 700 through the opening 701a.

  The electric accessory 701 and the downstream side of the opening 701 a are branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. The first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are provided with detection sensors 703a and 706a for detecting the passage of a sphere, respectively. In addition, since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703, the ball flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the ball flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707. In addition, at a position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 branch, a flow path through which the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 flows via the electric accessory 701 is switched to a switching valve ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slids and displaces) between a first switching state in which the sphere flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the sphere flows down to the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slid to the left when viewed from the front to close the upstream side of the second flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. Advances to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right when viewed from the front, thereby closing the upstream side of the first flow path and opening only the first flow path. The sphere proceeds to the second flow path.

  If the ball can enter the sorting prize winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down toward the second operation port 707. When the ball enters the second working port 707, the second working combination 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second entering port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which has a high ratio of giving the special symbol certainty change state when it is a big hit, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow direction (whether the first flow path 703 flows down or the second flow path 707 flows down) of the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first working port 704 is made of a known non-electrically-operated accessory, that is, the first working accessory 645a is switched to an open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the first working port 704. Can do. Further, when the first working combination 645a is in the open state, the first working combination 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entrance 64a2.

  On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second operation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operation mechanism 705. In other words, the second working combination 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second working port 707. Further, when the second working combination 645b is in the open state, the second working combination 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entrance 64b.

  In this way, by entering the ball into the distribution winning device 700, the ball enters the first working port 704 or the second working port 707, and the first working combination 645a or The two actuating items 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, a big win in the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. It can be noted. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the allocation prize winning device 1640 is changed, the point where the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b. The difference is that the configuration for entering the ball is changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment executes a game (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) aiming at the first entrance 64a1 in a normal game state. As a result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the entrance of the ball into the first entrance 64a1, a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won. In addition, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, the probability of winning a jackpot by a special drawing lottery after the jackpot game ends will be high, and the probability varying gaming state (hereinafter, the probable variation state) Although the probability of winning a jackpot does not change, a short-time gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a short-time state) that makes it easy to receive a special drawing lottery is given.

  Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probability variation state 1 in which the lottery of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probability variation state and a probability variation state 2 in which the lottery of FIG. Is provided. Also, the jackpot based on the lottery shown in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery shown in the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is increased, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is set so that it is easy to shift to a gaming state in which it is easy to win a big hit with a large number of balls that can be acquired by a big hit game.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probability variation state 1 that is more advantageous than the normal game for the player, and a probability variation state 2 that is more advantageous than the probability variation state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probability variation state is increased (to make it easier to enter the probability variation state 1), and the player can easily experience a game state (probability variation state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. This makes it easy to experience the effects executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game or the probability change state, and to make the game enjoyable, or to reduce the rate of transition to the probability change state 2 In addition, it is possible to provide a player with a sense of superiority to the probabilistic state 2 and improve the interest of the game for the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2 in the time-short state as well as the above-described certainty change state. Game state that is easy to receive special drawing lottery (the ball is easy to enter the entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special drawing lottery is set shorter than the normal gaming state) Easy gaming state) is set. Further, the time-short state 1 is configured such that the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is substantially executed, and the time-short state 2 is configured so that the lottery shown in FIG. 2 is substantially executed. This is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player.

  A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probability variation state 1 and the probability variation state 2 are set as the probability variation state and the time reduction state 1 and the time reduction state 2 are set as the time reduction state.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. When the game state shifts to a probabilistic state or a short-time state after the jackpot game ends, a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) targeting the right region of the game board 13 (the right region of the variable display unit 80) Executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball launched into the right area of the game board 13 collides with the rubber rubber 69 and close to the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down toward the sorting prize winning device 700. An electric prize 710 is provided in the distribution prize winning device 700, and a ball can enter the distribution prize winning device 700 when the electric prize 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is in an open state when the result of the normal symbol lottery (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 is successful. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and is configured so that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700 is different.

  Although the detailed description is the same as that of FIG. 61 of the third embodiment described above, a description thereof will be omitted, but the configuration in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric winnings 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 are opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (The time until the ball that entered the prize-winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is about 0.4 seconds). The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on winning in the win (per win) as a result of the general drawing lottery, and the first operation depends on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow down. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 65, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds after the winning of the normal drawing and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds). Thus, the switching valve 702 is operated, and the first flow path 703 is operated in other periods.

  A first working port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow path 703, while a second working port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow path 706, The ball that has flowed down enters one of the operation ports. Here, returning to FIG. 125, the first working port 704 and the second working port 707 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the first operating port 704 is connected to the first operating combination 645 a provided below the right side region of the game board 13 by the first operating mechanism 705, and enters the first operating port 704. When the sphere depresses the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operation mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first operation mechanism 705 is pushed up and the first contact piece is pushed up. The first working combination 645a comes into contact with the working combination 645a and is opened.

  Then, the first actuating member 645a is opened by the operation of the first actuating mechanism 705, so that the right first entrance 64a2 can enter the ball. When a ball enters the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed in the same manner as the first entrance 64a1, and the entered ball enters the other end of the first operating mechanism 705. By pressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first working combination 645a is closed.

  As described above, a mechanism for changing an accessory into an open state or a closed state by movement of a sphere without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-electrical accessory. In the present embodiment, a detailed description of the configuration of the non-electrically-powered article has been omitted, but any technique that has already been disclosed may be adopted as appropriate.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting and winning device 700 and entered the second operation port 707 is activated by the operation of the second operation mechanism 708 in the same manner as the above-described configuration of the non-electrically-operated accessory. 2 Open the working combination 645b. When the second working combination 645b is opened, a ball enters the right second entrance 64b that can enter the ball, and the lottery of FIG. 2 set more advantageous than FIG. 1 is performed. Executed. In addition, about the structure of the non-electrically-powered object comprised from the 2nd action port 707, the 2nd action mechanism 708, and the 2nd action member 645b, the 1st action port 704 mentioned above, the 1st action mechanism 705, and the 1st Since it is the same as the structure of the non-electrically-powered object comprised from the actuating object 645a, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is only provided for a predetermined period of time, that is, for 1.5 seconds after the electrification of the changeover valve 702 has been won per ordinary figure until 3.5 seconds have elapsed (2 seconds). The first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate in the other period (including the period not won per ordinary figure), and is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706. Since the special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) advantageous to the player is executed by the ball entering the second working combination 645b, the special drawing 2 lottery is prevented from being executed by an illegal game. Because.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description of the configuration of the right region of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b can enter the ball by entering the distribution winning device 700, the game board 13 is not entered without entering the distribution winning device 700. A sphere that has flowed down the right region is guided by a plurality of nails and enters any entrance that is ready to enter.

  Thus, in the gaming state (probability change state or short time state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the special drawing lottery (the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal gaming state. ing.

  Next, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710 and the switching member 702 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an opening pattern A and an opening pattern B as opening patterns of the electric combination (electric combination) 710. The opening pattern of the electric role is configured to be set according to the type of jackpot won by the special drawing lottery. In the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 (in a state where the RAM is cleared), the opening pattern A is set.

  When the opening pattern A is set, it will be opened for 1 second (becomes open) after winning the normal map, then closed for 1.4 seconds (becomes closed), and opened again (0.1 seconds) The operation of the electric accessory 710 is controlled (the hit period is 2.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory is opened for 0.1 seconds (becomes open), then closed for 1.4 seconds (becomes closed), and opened again (for 1 second). 710 is controlled in operation (the hit period is 2.5 seconds).

  As described above, the electric accessory 710 is configured so that the control content to be opened and closed is different depending on the set opening pattern. The opening pattern in which the operation control content of the electric accessory 710 is set is determined by the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

  In the fourth embodiment, the winning period (2.5 seconds) in the hit game (game per bonus figure) executed by the hit per game, and the open period (total time) of the electric accessory 710 during the hit period. In addition, the number of opening (two times) of the electric accessory 710 during the hit period is the same regardless of which of the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B is set. This is to reduce the processing load of the action control process in the winning game, and the player is expected to enter the allocation prize winning device 1640 regardless of which game is executed. This is because the degree is not changed.

  In addition, if the expectation degree that a ball enters the allocation prize-winning apparatus 700 does not change, another operation control content may be used as the control for operating the electric accessory 710. For example, it is possible to increase the number of times the sphere is released during a difficult period (0.1 seconds) or change the period during which the sphere is in a closed state where it is impossible (difficult) to enter.

  Furthermore, it is not necessary to unify the expected entry of the ball to the distribution winning device 700 in all the open patterns of the electric winnings 710, and it is difficult to enter a winning game that is easy to enter the distribution winning device 700. A winning game may be provided. In the fourth embodiment, the operation is controlled so that the electric accessory 710 is opened as soon as the win is won, but this means that the win is won by executing the win game immediately. This is to notify the player without delay. In addition, you may control operation | movement so that the electrically-driven accessory 710 may be made into an open state, after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) passes after winning a win.

  In the case of adopting such a configuration, it is preferable to use a configuration that uses a display device that can be visually recognized by the player, such as the third symbol display device 81, to notify that the player has won the game. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the player wins the game according to the usual plan and the distribution winning device 700 is ready to enter the ball. In addition, a technique for notifying whether or not to win a special symbol, a technology for notifying the lottery result (discrimination result) of a special symbol (identification symbol (identification information) when the identification symbol (identification information) is displayed after being variably displayed and then stopped) The technology may be used to notify the player using a lottery result (discrimination result) according to the display mode. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to enjoy both the special symbol and the normal symbol, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. In the distribution winning device 700, a switching valve 702 is provided for distributing the ball that has entered the ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path is communicated for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed after winning the normal figure. In the operation control of the switching valve 702, a constant operation is performed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

  Next, the flow of a ball entering the distribution prize winning device 700 for each electric role release pattern will be described. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, the period during which a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 is one second from the start of the game. The ball that has entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed as described above. At the timing when the ball reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the first flow path 1644 communicates, so that the ball is guided to the first flow path 1644. As described above, while the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operation port 704. In effect, the ball enters the right first entrance 64a2. That is, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination), a gaming state (time reduction state 1, probability variation state 1) in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates in the time shortening state or the probability variation state. Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric combination 701 is released for 0.1 second after 1.5 seconds have passed after the big win, but the opening for 0.1 second is difficult for the ball to enter. And almost no ball enters. If a ball enters the distribution prize device 700 during this period, the ball enters the distribution prize device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

  Next, when the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern, the period during which the ball can enter the allocation winning device 700 is 1 second after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. . The ball that has entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds have elapsed as described above. At the timing when the sphere reaches the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the second flow path 706 communicates, so that the sphere is guided to the second flow path 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is guided to the second flow path 706 and enters the second operation port 707. By acting on the ball, the ball can enter the right second entrance 64b. That is, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination), the gaming state (the time reduction state 2, the probability change state 2) in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates in the time reduction state or the probability change state. Will be set. In the opening pattern B, after winning the jackpot, the electric accessory 701 is released for 0.1 second. However, the opening for 0.1 second is a difficult interval for the ball to enter, and almost the ball has entered. There is no ball. If a ball enters the distribution prize winning device 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution prize winning device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern A described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the balls that have entered the opening pattern B are reliably controlled so that the balls that have entered the opening pattern A are reliably guided to the first flow path 703. In order to be guided to the second flow path 706, the operation is executed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701. This makes it possible to guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball is moved from the distribution winning device 700 during the operation of the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the usual fluctuation time is shortened (time reduction state, probability variation state), the usual fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, in the state where the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern, the switching valve 702 is started from the start of the normal drawing in order to surely guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to the second flow path. Even if the second flow path is placed in communication for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the first flow path remains in communication until the game is executed again after the next normal change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 across multiple games per multi-purpose game is guided to an unintended flow path.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the open pattern of the set electric combination (electric combination) is configured. Based on this, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially varies and a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially varies. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery (the number of balls that can be earned by the jackpot game is substantially larger. Is set to be given a high ratio of shifting to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed.

  As a result, the short-time state and the probable change state are further advantageous to the player (the short-time state 2 and the probable state 2), which are more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time reduction state 1, probability variation state 1) that is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, by setting a high transition rate for shifting from the normal game state to the time-short state 1 or the probability variation state 1, the player can easily see the effects executed in the time-short state or the probability variation state. Or by setting a low transition rate to shift to the probability variation state 2 that is the most advantageous game state for the player, giving a superiority to the player transitioning to the probability variation state 2 By doing so, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

  In the fourth embodiment, two types of opening pattern A and opening pattern B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component), but the type of the opening pattern is not limited to this. Three or more types may be settable. This makes it possible to set more various gaming states.

  In the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening for guiding the sphere to the second flow path 706 are used as an opening pattern of the electric combination (electric component). A pattern (open pattern B) is set. For example, an open pattern in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the sphere is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided. Also good. As a result, the player can enjoy which channel (the first channel 703 or the second channel 706) the ball that has entered the electric accessory 701 is guided to, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

  Furthermore, in this 4th Embodiment, although the ball | bowl which entered into the allocation prize-winning apparatus 700 is comprised so that it may enter into one of the operation ports (the 1st operation port 704 or the 2nd operation port 707), for example, An outflow that communicates with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without providing a flow path that is discharged again from the distribution prize winning device 700 to the game board 13 or entering each operation port. A flow path for entering the mouth may be provided. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution prize winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation after the winning game is executed. For example, the switching valve 702 always performs a constant operation after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It may be configured such that the flow path that communicates is switched when the number of balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  In the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). For example, the switching valve 702 that is a switching member is operated when a ball abuts, and a predetermined condition (for example, It may be configured such that the flow path communicating is switched when 10 balls pass).

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the sphere guided to any flow path by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any working port. A distribution member that distributes the sphere guided to one of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere distributed to the specific flow path by the distribution member enters the corresponding operation port. May be.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As means for varying (extending) the time for a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set to a period. A plurality of different paths may be provided, and distribution means for distributing the balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 700 to any one of the paths may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who can play a game while predicting at which timing a ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702 from getting bored of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 132. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the allocation winning device 700, the right first entrance 64a2, and the right second entrance 64b are provided in the right area (hereinafter, the right hit area) of the game board 13. It had been.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the left through gate 67a and the first entrance 64a1 are provided in the left area of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as the left hit area LE). The right through gate 67b and the second entrance 64b1 are provided in the 13 right hit area RE, and the lower side of the game board 13 through which any of the game balls launched into the left hit area LE and the right hit area RE can pass. The third allocation winning device 7000 is provided in the area (hereinafter referred to as the central region CE) in place of the allocation winning device 700, the variable winning device 165 is provided in the central region CE, and the third allocation winning device. The difference is that a central first entrance 64a3 and a central second entrance 64b3 into which a game ball entered in 7000 can enter and a first variable winning device 65 are deleted. In addition, about the structure same as 4th Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 126 is a view showing the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 126, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different in a game aiming at the left-hand hit area LE (hereinafter referred to as a left-hand hit game) and a game aiming at the right hit area RE (hereinafter referred to as a right-hand hit game). It has sex.

  Specifically, in the left-handed game, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 is executed, and a special symbol 1 (special illustration 1) is drawn based on the entrance of the game ball into the first entrance 64a1. Executed. As a result of the lottery shown in FIG. 1, when the jackpot is won, the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the third distribution winning device 7000 after completion of the jackpot game (short time state) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Or until you win the next jackpot).

  In this time-short state, a time-short state (time-short state 1, time-short state 2) having different degrees of advantage for the player is set as in the above-described fourth embodiment, and a lottery is executed in the left-handed game. As a result of the lottery shown in Fig. 1, after winning the jackpot, the short time state 1 (the ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000 enters the entrance for executing the lottery shown in Fig. 1 (the first entrance) Only a short time state when it flows down to the mouth 64a2) can be set.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed game, a game aiming at the second entrance 64b1 is executed, and a lottery of the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) is executed based on the entrance of the game ball into the second entrance 64b1. . As a result of the lottery shown in FIG. 2, when a specific jackpot is won, the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the third distribution winning device 7000 after the end of the jackpot game (short time state) It is configured such that a ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000 flows into the entrance for executing the lottery shown in FIG. 2 (the short time state when the ball enters the second entrance 64b2).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can select any one of the different game characteristics and execute the game by arbitrarily selecting whether to perform the left hit game or the right hit game. it can.

  By using such a configuration, for example, in the left-handed game, as a result of the lottery in Fig. 1 (big hit probability 1/100), if the big hit is won, the short time state (short time state 1) with high probability (including 100%) ) (For example, with a probability of 30%, it shifts to the time reduction state (time reduction state 1) until the next jackpot, and with a probability of 70%, the time reduction state (time reduction state 1 until the special figure change is executed 50 times) ), And it is possible to execute a game (a game with low gambling ability) aiming for a further jackpot during the short game (time-short game 1) at that time.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed game, as a result of the lottery of special figure 2 (1/100 jackpot probability (same as the jackpot probability of special figure 1)), when the jackpot is won, the predetermined probability (when the jackpot is won in special figure 1) Transition to the time-short state (time-short state 2) with a lower probability (for example, 30%) than the probability that the time-short state (time-short state 1) is given to (for example, the time-short state (time-short state 2) until the next big hit) It is possible to execute a game (a game with high joyfulness) aiming at a further jackpot during the short time state (short time state 2).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a big hit during the time reduction state 2, the probability (for example, 80%) is higher than the case where the lottery of the special figure 2 is a big hit in the non-time reduction state. %), A game that loops between jackpot and time-short state 2 with a high probability once it has shifted to time-short state 2 (high euphoria) Game) can be executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to select and execute a game with low gambling ability and a game with high gambling ability by selecting a game for launching a game ball. Since it is comprised, in order for a player to perform the game from which gambling nature differs, the action which moves to the pachinko machine 10 which bothers to be different can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling characteristics according to the investment amount of the game and the earned ball, the variation of the game can be increased.

  Here, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. Although a detailed description will be given later, the probability variation state in the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the special figure hardly changes with respect to the normal state that is not the probability variation state (for example, the jackpot probability of the normal state is For 1/100, the jackpot probability of the probability variation state is 5/400). This is the case when the lottery result of special figure 2 in the right hit game in the normal state is a big hit and when the lottery result of special figure 2 in the right hit game in the probable state is the big hit This is to change the probability of transition to a state that is advantageous to the user.

  Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. A variable winning device 165 is provided in the central region CE so that a game ball can be entered in the jackpot game to be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol (special chart 1 or special chart 2) is a jackpot. The game balls that have passed through the right hit area RE and the left hit area LE are configured to be able to enter.

  As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot game using the same variable winning device 165 in the case of a big hit as a result of the right hit game and in the case of a big hit as a result of the left hit game. It is possible to reduce the number of parts constituting the machine 10.

  In this embodiment, the same variable winning device 165 is used for the right hit game and the left hit game. However, other configurations may be used, for example, a variable for the right hit game. A winning device (right variable winning device) is provided in the right hit area RE, a left winning game variable winning device (left variable winning device) is provided in the left hit area LE, and a game ball enters each variable winning device. In some cases, the number of game balls to be paid out (number of prize balls) may be varied. In this case, for example, it may be set so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is increased when a game ball enters the right variable prize winning device with respect to the left variable prize winning device. Thereby, there exists an effect that the level of euphoria can be made clearer.

  Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. In the central area CE, a third distribution prize is awarded at a location where a ball that has passed through the variable prize winning device 165 without entering the variable prize winning device 165 can enter (below the variable prize winning device 165 (downstream)). A device 7000 is provided. Here, the configuration of the third distribution prize winning device 7000 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the third distribution winning device 7000. FIG. 127 (a) shows the first action port 704 in which a ball that has entered the third distribution winning device 7000 is shown. FIG. 127 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow when entering the third first prize entry device 7000 and entering the central first entrance 64 a 3. It is the schematic diagram which showed.

  The third distribution winning device 7000 is different from the second distribution winning device 700 of the fourth embodiment described above in that the central first winning entrance 64a3 and the central second winning entrance in the third distribution winning device 7000. 64b3, a configuration in which a ball entering the third distribution winning device 7000 and flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704 or the central first entrance 64a3 and the first The difference is that a configuration is adopted in which a sphere that has flowed down the two flow paths 706 enters the second working port 707 or the central second inlet 64b3. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second distribution prize winning device 700 of the fourth embodiment described above, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (a), the switching valve 702 is moving so that the game ball that has entered the third distribution prize winning device 7000 can flow down the first flow path 703 (that is, the short-time state). In 1), when a game ball enters the third distribution winning device 7000, first, it flows down the first flow path 703 and enters the first operation port 704. When a game ball enters the first operation port 704, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the first operation combination 645a is opened, and then the game ball that has entered the third distribution prize winning device 7000. Enters the central first entrance 64a3.

  In this way, whether the game ball that has entered the third distribution prize winning device 7000 flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 depends on the type of the short time state (the short time state 1). Therefore, the game balls that have entered the third sorting and winning device 7000 flow down through the same flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706). Will do. Therefore, the ball that has entered the third distribution winning device 7000 enters the operation port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707), and then enters the third distribution winning device 7000. Balls can alternately enter the entrance (the central first entrance 64a3 or the central second entrance 64b3).

  In the present embodiment, the central first entrance 64a3 and the central second entrance 64b3 are provided in the third distribution winning device 7000, but other configurations may be used. If the left ball game or the right ball game can be entered in the center region CE through which the game ball flowing down the region LE or the right ball hit area RE can pass, the third allocation prize You may provide outside the apparatus 7000. FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 126, the flow of the game balls flowing down the game board 13 provided with the above-described components will be described. First, when a left-handed game is executed and a game ball flows down in the left-handed region LE, it passes through the left through gate 67a. Then, the game balls that have passed through the left through gate 67a are transferred to the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, and the variable winning device 165 (by the nails Q1, Q2, and Q3 provided above the first winning port 64a. Or, it is distributed to a flow path that is easy to enter any of the third distribution winning devices 7000).

  That is, for example, when the nail Q3 is adjusted to the left in order to lower the rate of entering the first entrance 64a, the proportion of entering the variable prize device 165 (or the third distribution prize device 7000) accordingly. When the nail Q2 is adjusted to the right in order to decrease the rate of entering the first entrance 64a, the proportion of entering the general winning entrance 63 is increased accordingly. Therefore, it can suppress that the nail adjustment which becomes a disadvantage for a player is performed. Note that the second entrance 64b and the nails Q4, Q5, and Q6 in the right-hand hit area RE are also configured with the same relationship, but the content is the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a enters the first entrance 64a, the lottery in FIG. 1 is executed, passes through the left through gate 67a, and toward the variable winning device 165. The game ball that flows down enters the variable winning device 165 if it is during the big hit game, and passes through the variable winning device 165 and flows down to the third distribution winning device 7000 if it is not during the big hit game. Then, in a state where the passing hole 701a of the third distribution winning device 7000 is closed by the electric accessory 701, the player enters the out port 71 without entering the third distribution winning device 7000, and plays the game board. 13 is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface.

  On the other hand, in a state where the electric accessory 701 opens the passage opening 701a of the third distribution winning device 7000, the game ball enters the third distribution winning device 7000 and can be passed by the switching valve 702. The flow path (the first flow path 703, the second flow path 706), and the operation port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707) or the entrance (the central first entrance 64a3 or the center) The ball enters the second entrance 64b3).

  In this control example, a game ball that has entered the third distribution winning device 7000 is an operation port (first operation port 704 or second operation port 707) or a ball entrance (central first ball entry port 64a3 or A configuration for entering a ball in any of the second central entrance 64b3) is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, an out port may be provided, or the game board 13 is released again. You may comprise.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game state of the player (left hit game or right hit game) is configured to be discriminable (for example, discriminated by detecting a game ball entering each entrance) The area where the player is playing a game (left hit area LE or right hit area RE) can be identified.

  Specifically, the brightness of various left decoration LEDs provided in the left-hand hit area LE and various right decoration LEDs provided in the right-hand hit area RE are changed in accordance with the gaming state (left hit game or right hit game). The brightness of the LEDs provided in the game area where the game is currently being executed is increased. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, you may use other than the structure mentioned above, for example, the glass unit 16 which covers the game board 13 is comprised with a half mirror, and only the area | region where the game is played now can be seen (a player can visually recognize the game board 13). Control to transmit) may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the central portion CE is provided with a common electric component 701 that allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the variable winning device 165 and the third distribution winning device 7000 (left-handed game and right-handed game). The number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 is reduced by using a common batting game). However, the variable winning device 165 and the electric player 701 are provided separately for the left batting game and the right batting game, respectively. Alternatively, the third distribution winning device 7000 may be provided separately for the left-handed game and the right-handed game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the center area CE is provided as an area where both the game ball flowing down the left hit area LE and the game ball flowing down the right hit area RE can flow down. The region LE and the right strike region RE may be completely separated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down to an unintended area.

  Further, the handle 51 is provided with adjusting means (such as an adjusting button) for adjusting the launching force of the game ball. The player may easily aim at a desired area (left hit area LE or right hit area RE).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state transition. As shown in FIG. 128, the pachinko machine 10 has a normal state, a latent probability changing state, and a short-time state 1 (a short time state for changing the special figure 1) in which the electric accessory 701 is difficult to open (a game without electric support). Short time)), short time state 2 (special figure 2 variable short time state (advantageous short time)) is configured to shift based on the winning jackpot type.

  First, the case where the left-handed game is executed in the normal state will be described. In the left-handed game, a game in which the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) is executed is performed, and when winning the jackpot, 30% shifts to a promising / short-time state 1 (until the next jackpot) and 50% changes (until the next jackpot) ) ・ Time-short state 1 (50 times), 20% normal / time-short state 1 (50 times)

  Next, when the state is shifted to the time-saving (game with electric support) state, the respective game states are transferred at the rates shown, and when the time-short state is completed, the game shifts to a game without electric support as shown.

  On the other hand, when a right-handed game is executed in the normal state, a game in which the fluctuation (lottery) of Special Figure 2 is executed is performed, and if winning a big hit, 30% is in a promising / short time state 2 (until the next big hit) 50% shift to probability change (until next jackpot), no time reduction (that is, latent probability change state), and 20% shift to the normal state.

  Then, when winning a jackpot in the time-saving state 2 (game with electric support), 80% shifts to the probable / time-saving state 2 (until the next jackpot), and 20% shifts to the normal state. That is, the left-handed game shifts from the normal state to the short-time state (time-short state 1) with a probability of 100%, while the right-handed game changes from the normal state to the time-short state (short-time state 2) only with a probability of 30%. It is set not to migrate. That is, it is possible to execute a game in which a left-handed game is more easily given a short-time game from the normal state.

  On the other hand, in the short-time state (game with electric support), the left hit game has a 30% probability of shifting to the game state in which the short-time state is set until the next big hit, whereas the right-hand hit game is in the short-time state Is set to a high probability of 80% to shift to the gaming state set until the next jackpot. In other words, once the game shifts to the short-time state, it is possible to execute a game in which the right hit game is easier to continue the short-time state.

  As described above, when a player selects a game method (left hit game, right hit game), the player easily shifts from the normal state to the short time state, and easily shifts from the short time state to the normal state. Execute a game (left hit game with low euphoria), or execute a game that does not easily change from the normal state to the short-time state, and difficult to change from the short-time state to the normal state (high hitting game) be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to save the trouble of moving to a different pachinko machine 10 when a player executes a game with different gambling characteristics.

<Electrical Configuration of Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The eighth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a first random number 2 table 202a is provided instead of the first random number table 202a, and the first random type selection table 202b is replaced with a first one. The difference is that a hit type selection 2 table 202b is provided. About another structure, it is the same as 4th Embodiment mentioned above, attaches | subjects the same code | symbol to the same location, and abbreviate | omits the detailed description.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per random number 2 table 202a, and FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per type selection 2 table 202b.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), in the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399, and when the special symbol has a low probability (in the normal state). There are four random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random values “0 to 3” are stored in the first random number table 202a as determination values for low probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability (in the normal state), the total number of random numbers that is a big hit is 4 among the total number of random numbers, and the probability that the special symbol is a big hit is “1 / 100 ".

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability (in the probability variation state), there are five random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 5” is a high probability in the first random number table 202a. Is stored as a judgment value. In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability (in the probability variation state), the total number of random values that are big hits is 5 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is a big hit is “1 / 80 ".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol jackpot probability in the normal state and the special symbol jackpot probability in the probability variation state are set so as not to cause a large difference. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. Note that the special symbol jackpot probability in the normal state and the special symbol jackpot probability in the probabilistic state are set to other values if the special symbol jackpot probability is set higher than in the normal state. For example, the total number of random number values is 4000, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots in the normal state is 40 (probability of jackpots is 1/100), and the total number of random number values that are jackpots in the probability variation state is 41 ( The jackpot probability may be set to be approximately 1/98).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the first hit type selection 2 table 202b in the present embodiment includes a special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3, a special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4, and a special figure. 2 selection 2 table (short time) 202b5 is set.

  Here, the contents of the special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3. In this pachinko machine 10, three types of jackpot types from jackpot A to jackpot C are set as jackpot types selected when the jackpot is determined in the lottery (discrimination) of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), the value “0-29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit B. “30 to 79” is set, and for the jackpot C, the value “80 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

  Here, when jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is awarded as a jackpot game, a certain change state is given until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends, and further, the electric role is released The time-short state (time-short state 1) in which the open pattern A is set as a pattern is given until the next jackpot is won. When jackpot A is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  When jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 8 rounds is awarded as a jackpot game, and a promising state is given until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends, and an opening pattern A is used as a power release pattern. Is set until the special symbol is changed 50 times. In addition, when the jackpot B is executed, about 500 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  When jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type, a four-round jackpot game is awarded as the jackpot game, and the probability pattern is not given after the jackpot game ends, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern. The short state (short time state 1) is applied until the special symbol is changed 50 times. When the jackpot C is executed, about 250 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4. This special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4 is referred to in the normal state when a big hit is made in the lottery (discrimination) of special figure 2, and from the big hit D as the selected big hit type Three types of jackpot types up to jackpot F are set.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (b), the value “0-29” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit D, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit E. “30 to 79” is set, and for the big hit F, the value “80 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

  Here, when the jackpot type D is selected as the jackpot type, a 15-round jackpot game is awarded as the jackpot game, and a promising state is given until the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends, and further, the electric role is released. The time-short state (time-short state 2) in which the open pattern B is set as a pattern is given until the next jackpot is won. When the jackpot D is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  If jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type, eight rounds of jackpot game will be awarded as a jackpot game, and after the jackpot game will not be given a short-time state, will be given a promising state until the next jackpot is won The In addition, when the jackpot B is executed, about 500 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  When the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, four rounds of jackpot game are awarded as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is finished, the time-short state and the probability change state are not given. When the jackpot C is executed, about 250 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time reduction) 202b5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (short time) 202b5. This special figure 2 selection 2 table (time reduction) 202b5 is referred to in the time reduction state when a big hit is made in the lottery (discrimination) of special figure 2, and the above special figure 2 selection 2 table is described above. (Normal) 202b4 is different in that the jackpot E is set instead of the jackpot E. The description of the same configuration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 131, in the special figure 2 selection 2 table (short time) 202b5, when the jackpot G is selected, eight rounds of jackpot game is awarded as the jackpot game, and the next jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends. Until the next big hit is won, the short time state (short time state 2) in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric utility opening pattern is given. When the jackpot G is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 2 selection 2 table (short time) 202b5, the short time state (short time state 2) is assigned at a distribution rate of 80%, and the special figure 2 selection 2 table is provided. (Normal) 202b4 is set so that the time reduction state (time reduction state 2) is given at a distribution rate of 30%. Thus, the probability that the short-time state (short-time state 2) is given by the big jackpot (that is, the initial hit) of the special figure 2 in the normal state and the big jackpot of the special figure 2 in the short-time state (that is, the big jackpot in the villa) Can be made different.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference between the rate at which the gaming state shifts to the gaming state (short time state 2) advantageous to the player and the rate at which the gaming state (short time state 2) advantageous to the player is looped. Therefore, despite the transition to a gaming state (short time state 2) that is advantageous to the player and has a low transition probability, the player immediately transitions to another gaming state (for example, the normal state). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is dissatisfied.

  As described above, in the above-described eighth embodiment, when the player executes a game aiming at the left strike area LE of the game board 13 and the game aiming at the right strike area RE of the game board 13. It is possible to execute different games (games with different gambling characteristics) depending on the case of executing. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the act of moving to a different pachinko machine 10 in order for the player to execute games with different gambling characteristics. Furthermore, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling characteristics according to the investment amount of the game and the earned ball, the variation of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the variable winning device 165 that is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered during the jackpot game that is executed when a special symbol jackpot is won in the left-handed game or the right-handed game is displayed in the left-handed region LE or the right-handed game. Since any game ball that has flowed down the region RE is provided in the central region CE where it can flow down, the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the third distribution prize device 7000 is provided in the central region CE, the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, whether or not the ball that entered the third distribution winning device 7000 enters the central first entrance 64a3 or the central second entrance 64b3 depends on the type of the short-running state (short-running state). 1 or the time-short state 2). Therefore, in the time-short state, when the game for causing the third sorting and winning device 7000 to enter the ball is executed, either the left-handed game or the right-handed game is executed. The same game result (game ball entry result in the third distribution prize device 7000) can be obtained.

  Thus, for example, when the right hit game results in a time-short state (time-short state 2), it is possible to make a left hit rather than performing a right hit game and causing the third distribution winning device 7000 to enter the game ball. When it is easier to enter a game ball into the third distribution prize winning device 7000 by performing a game, the game method can be changed from a right-handed game to a left-handed game. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) suitable for the current game state (normal state, short-time state), and to increase game motivation.

  In addition, adjustment of the nail implanted in the game board 13 can be considered as a cause of the difference in the ease of entering the third distribution winning device 7000 between the left hit game and the right hit game. The guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the left strike area LE toward the third sorting prize device 7000 is adjusted to the right by making a nail adjustment that allows the game ball to pass through the through gate 67a more easily than the right through gate 67b. It is conceivable to adjust the nail so that the game ball can be guided more easily than the guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the region RE toward the third distribution winning device 7000.

  Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a front view of the game board 13 according to a modification of the eighth embodiment. This modification is provided with a plurality of (two) passage openings through which the game balls can enter the sorting device 7000, as compared with the above-described eighth embodiment. Are provided in such a manner that a variable electric combination (a left electric combination 701a and a right electric combination 701b) can be provided between a permissible position and a restricting position where the game ball passes through the left through gate 67a. Based on the normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) executed when the left electric role 701a is controlled to be released based on the normal symbol lottery (left normal symbol lottery) and the game ball passes through the right through gate 67b. The difference is that the right electric accessory 701b is controlled to be opened. Other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the left electric accessory 701a is provided in the left hitting region LE, and the result of the normal symbol lottery (left normal symbol lottery) executed when the game ball passes through the left through gate 67a is obtained. It is configured to be opened (allowable position) when a hit is made. When the time-short state 1 is set, the left electric accessory 701a is controlled to be opened so that a game ball can easily enter.

  On the other hand, when the right electric character 701b is provided in the right hit area RE and the result of the normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the right through gate 67b is a win. Are opened (allowable position). The right electric player 701b is controlled to be released so that a game ball can easily enter when the time reduction state 2 is set.

  In this way, for the third distribution prize winning device 7000, there are provided passage openings (left passage opening, right passage opening) through which a game ball can enter for left-handed game and right-handed game, respectively. By providing the left electric combination 701a with respect to the mouth and the right electric combination 701b with respect to the right passage opening, it is possible to reliably separate the right-handed game and the left-handed game even in a short time state.

  Further, when the time-short state 1 is set for the left electric accessory 701a that is controlled to be released based on the normal symbol lottery (left normal symbol lottery) executed by the game ball passing through the left through gate 67a. A right electric combination 701b that is configured so that a game ball can easily enter and is controlled to be released based on a normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) that is executed when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67b. When the time-short state 2 is set, the release control is performed so that the game ball can easily enter the game. Therefore, the game is performed on the electric accessory 701a in the state where the time-short state 2 that is most advantageous to the player is set. The ball can be prevented from entering.

  In this modification, the same configuration as that of the above-described eighth embodiment is used in the third distribution prize winning device 7000, and the left electric combination 701a or the right electric combination 701b is opened (allowed). The game ball that has passed through each passing port in a state of being present is guided on the switching valve 702, but other configurations may be used.

  For example, the left electric combination 701a is opened, and a ball entered from the left passage opening flows down the first flow path 703, the right electric combination 701b is opened, and a ball entered from the right passage opening is the second flow. You may comprise so that the path 706 may flow down. Thereby, the left hit game and the right hit game can be reliably separated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game unintended by the player from being executed.

  The configuration of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the eighth embodiment described above may be combined with the configuration of each control example and each embodiment described above.

<First Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated. The first modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution winning device 7000 is provided instead of the distribution winning device 700. Details of the prize distribution device 7000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 7000 in the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the distribution prize device 7000 includes a distribution prize device 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment, and a distribution prize device 700 (see FIG. 81) in the fourth embodiment. It is the composition which combined. The basic function of the distribution winning device 7000 is the same as that of the distribution winning device 700, and when a ball enters (is distributed) into the first operation port 7040 of the distribution winning device 7000. Then, the first working combination 645a attached to the right first entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first entrance 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation port 7070 provided in the distribution prize winning device 7000 (if the ball is entered), the second working accessory 645b attached to the right second entry port is opened. , And a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b.

  When a ball enters the right second entrance 64b, it is possible to execute a lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high ratio of giving a special symbol probable state in the case of a big win, so that the player It will be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation port (whether the ball enters the first operation port 7040 or the second operation port 7070) into which the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 133, an electric accessory 7010 is provided on the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 7000. This electric combination 7010 is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) enter the distribution winning apparatus 7000, similarly to the electric combination 701 of the distribution winning apparatus 700 in the modification of the first embodiment. It is configured to be switchable between an (immersion state) and a closed state (protrusion state) where the ball cannot enter (difficult). The electric accessory 7010 is set to an open state when it is a win through a normal symbol lottery.

  In the distribution prize winning device 7000, a guide channel 7020 through which a sphere can flow is provided, and a magnetic sensor 7020a for detecting the passage of the sphere is provided downstream of the guide channel 7020. A first rotating body 7090 is provided below the magnetic sensor 7020a. The first rotating body 7090 is provided with four recesses (rotating entrances 7090a to 7090d) around which a game ball can enter in the same manner as the probability variation rotating body 900 in the modified example of the first embodiment. Yes. Among these recesses, the rotation entrance 7090a is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the back side. Accordingly, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 7000 enters the rotation entrance 7090a, and the first rotating body rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, and the first operation port on the back side of the rotation entrance 7090a. When the positional relationship of 7040 is reached, the game ball rolls from the rotation entrance 7090a toward the back side thereof and enters the first operation entrance 7040. In this case, the first working combination 645a attached to the right first entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first entrance 64a2.

  On the other hand, the rotation entrances 7090b to 7090d are provided with wall portions that prevent the sphere from being guided to the back side. Therefore, even when the first rotating body 7090 rotates to the front side of the first operating port 7040, the game ball that has entered the rotating entrances 7090b to 7090d is blocked by the wall portion, and the first operating port 7040 is rotated. Can't enter the ball. Therefore, the game balls that have entered the rotary entrances 7090b to 7090d are guided to the guide channel 7060 that continues to the second rotary body 7091.

  The guide channel 7060 is provided with a magnetic sensor 7060a for detecting the passed game ball, and the game ball detected by the magnetic sensor 7060a flows down to the second rotating body 7091. Similarly to the first rotating body 7090, the second rotating body 7091 is also provided with four concave portions (rotating entrance holes 7091a to 7091d) into which a game ball can enter, and only the rotating entrance 7091a is a game ball. Is configured to be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball enters the rotation entrance 7091a, the second rotating body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the second operation port 7070 is arranged in front of the rotation entrance 7091a. In this case, the game ball rolls in the rear side direction and enters the second operation port 7070. In this case, the second working accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance 64b is switched to the open state, and a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the rotation entrances 7091b to 7091d, the game ball is not guided to the second operation port 7070, and thus is guided to the discharge channel 656 and from the discharge port 657. It is discharged outside.

  The first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091 always rotate at a constant speed until the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the power is turned off. More specifically, the first rotating body 7090 is rotated clockwise in front view at a rotation speed of one rotation for 5 seconds, and the second rotating body 7091 is rotated counterclockwise in front view at a rotation speed of one rotation in 3 seconds. , Respectively. As a result, the game ball enters the first operation port 7040 according to the timing at which the electric symbol 7010 is released and the timing at which the game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 7000. Whether to enter the ball (enter the rotation entrance 7090a), enter the second operation port 7070 (enter the rotation entrance 7091a), or enter the exit 657 change. This allows the player to observe the arrangement of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091) more interestingly when the game ball enters the distribution prize device 7000. it can. That is, when the game ball reaches the first rotating body 7090, the game ball flows down to the second rotating body 7091 without being guided to the first operating port 7040 (the game ball is rotated into the rotating entrance 7090b). It is possible to expect to enter any of 7090d. Also, when the game ball reaches the second rotating body 7091, it is expected that the game ball is guided to the second operation port 7070 (the game ball enters the rotation entrance 7091a). Can do.

  As described above, in this modification, the game ball is moved to any one of the first operation port 7040, the second operation port 7070, and the discharge port 657 by the distribution winning device 7000 that is easy to enter in the short time state of the normal symbol. It is configured to distribute. In addition, the operation port (or the discharge port) to which the game balls are distributed varies depending on the rotation positions of the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interestingly observe the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000 and the arrangement of the rotating bodies (first rotating body 7090, second rotating body 7091). And when a game ball is distributed to the 2nd operation port 7070, a player can be pleased.

  In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, in the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091, a rotation entrance (rotation entrance 7090a, Although only one rotational entrance 7091a) is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and an arbitrary number may be set. For example, if the number of recesses for guiding the game ball to the back side in the first rotating body 7090 is increased (for example, the number is increased to two of the rotational entrances 7090a and 7090b), The probability that a game ball enters 7040 (the probability that the first working combination 645a associated with the right first entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state) can be increased, so that a big hit can be made in the short-time state. A lot of lotteries for the first special symbol which is unlikely to be given a certain change state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the probability variation state from continuing excessively and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. Further, for example, if the number of recesses for guiding the game ball to the back side in the first rotating body 7091 is increased (for example, the number is increased to three of the rotation entrances 7091a to 7091c), the second in the time-saving state. It is possible to increase the probability that a game ball will enter the operation port 7070 (the probability that the second working accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance port 64b will be switched to the open state), so that it was a big hit in the short time state. In this case, it is possible to execute many lotteries for the second special symbol in which the probability variation state is easily given. Therefore, since the rate at which the probability variation state is given after the big hit ends can be increased, the expectation for the probability variation state can be further increased. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091 are configured to rotate at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotational speed may be varied randomly. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to recognize when to enter the sorting prize winning device 7000 in order for the game ball to enter the second working port 7070. it can. Thereby, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000, the whereabouts of the game ball can be watched more interestingly. Further, the rotational speed may be varied regularly instead of being varied randomly. Specifically, for example, the rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 is increased within a range in which a game ball that has entered the distribution prize winning device 7000 can enter the rotation entrance 7090a, and the rotation entrance 7090a The rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 may be slowed in a range where it is impossible to enter the ball (it is possible to enter the rotation entrances 7090b to 7090d). By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the rotation entrance 7090a and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first operation port 7040, so that the game ball relatively enters the second operation port 7070. It is possible to make it easy to enter a game ball. Further, for example, the rotation speed of the second rotating body 7091 is decreased at a rotation position in a range where the game ball flowing down the guide channel 7060 can enter the rotation entrance 7091a, and enters the rotation entrance 7091a. The rotational speed of the second rotating body 7091 may be increased at a rotational position in a range where it is impossible to enter a ball (the ball can enter the rotation entrances 7091b to 7091d). By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the rotary entrance 7091a, and therefore, the second working accessory 645b associated with the right second entrance 64b is easily opened. Therefore, since it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b, an advantageous second special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the sense of expectation for the short time state can be further enhanced.

  In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the game ball that has entered the rotation entrances 7091b to 7091d of the second rotator 7091 is guided to the exit 657. It is not something that can be done. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides the operation port which has the same function as the 1st operation port 7040 (The operation ball | bowl 645a is operated to an open state when a game ball enters). By configuring in this way, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000, either the first working combination 645a or the second working combination 645b can be operated in an open state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091 are each provided with four recesses into which a ball can enter, but the number of recesses is four. It is not restricted to an individual, and may be determined arbitrarily. Further, the ratio of the recesses capable of guiding the game ball to the back side of each rotating body may be arbitrarily determined. By configuring in this way, the probability (ratio) that the game ball is guided to the first working port 7040 and the second working port 7070 can be set more finely. The rate of entry into the state can be set more freely (finely).

  In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the internal structure of the distribution winning device 7000 is the same as that of the distribution winning device 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment. It is not limited to. For example, you may employ | adopt the distribution prize apparatus 650 (refer FIG. 3) in the said 1st Embodiment.

  Note that the distribution prize device 7000 according to the present modification may be applied to the distribution prize device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the panel configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. Thereby, the freedom degree of design of the pachinko machine 10 can be raised more.

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the fourth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. The second modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution winning device 8000 is provided instead of the distribution winning device 700. As shown in FIG. 134, the distribution prize device 8000 includes a distribution prize device 64c according to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 40A and 40B) and a distribution prize device 700 according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 81)). The basic function of the distribution winning device 8000 is the same as that of the distribution winning device 700 (see FIG. 81), and a ball enters the first operation port 8040 of the distribution winning device 8000 (distribution). The first working combination 645a associated with the right first entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first entrance 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation port 8070 provided in the distribution prize winning device 8000 (if the ball is entered), the second working accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance port is opened. , And a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b.

  When a ball enters the right second entrance 64b, it is possible to execute a lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high ratio of giving a special symbol probable state in the case of a big win, so that the player It will be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation port (whether the ball enters the first operation port 8040 or the second operation port 8070) into which the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 134, on the upper surface of the distribution winning device 8000, an electric combination 8010 having the same configuration as the electric combination 701 of the distribution winning device 700 in the fourth embodiment is provided. In the same manner as the electric accessory 701 described above, the electric accessory 8010 is in an open state (immersion state) where the ball can enter (easy) and a closed state (protrusion) where the ball cannot enter (difficult). State). The electric accessory 8010 is set in an open state when it is a win through a normal symbol lottery.

  The game balls that have entered the electric prize 8010 from the electric winning combination 8010 flow down the guide channel 8020. The guide channel 8020 is provided with a magnetic sensor 8030a for detecting the passage of a game ball (the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 8000). Further, adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are provided below the magnetic sensor 8030a. The game ball that has passed through the opening 8030c between the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b enters either the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070 provided downstream thereof. As described above, when the ball has entered (sorted) the first working port 8040, the first working combination 645a associated with the right first entering port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entering The ball can enter the ball port 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation port 8070 provided in the distribution prize winning device 8000 (if the ball is entered), the second working accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance port is opened. , And a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b.

  The adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are configured such that the inclination thereof can be adjusted by a store clerk or the like of the game shop in the same manner as the adjustment nails t1 and t2 in the first embodiment. As the adjustment nail 8030a is adjusted to be inclined downward, the upper side of the first operation port 8070 is blocked by the adjustment nail 8030b, so that the game ball is less likely to advance to the second operation port 8070. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8040. On the contrary, as the game nail 8030b is adjusted to be inclined downward, the upper side of the second operation port 8040 is blocked by the adjustment nail 8030b, so that the game ball is less likely to advance to the first operation port 8040. Thus, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8070.

  As described above, in this modification, the operation port (first operation port 8040 or second operation port 8070) that is easy to enter the ball in the time-short state can be varied by adjusting the adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b. . That is, whether the ball is likely to enter the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b when the right hand is made in the short-time state (and the probability variation state). Since it can be varied, it is possible to vary the probability (ratio) that the probability variation state is given when the jackpot is won. More specifically, if the adjustment nail 8030b is tilted downward so as to prevent entry into the first working port 8040, and the right hand is made in the state of probability variation, only the second special symbol lottery is executed. It can be set as a structure. Therefore, the probability variation state continuation rate can be set to 80%. On the other hand, if the adjustment nail 8030a is tilted downward so as to prevent the ball entering the second operation port 8070 from being hindered, when the right hand is made in a certain change state, only the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the probability variation state continuation rate can be set to 50%. As described above, in this modification, the adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are configured to be adjustable, so that the probability change entry rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied in accordance with the business policy of the amusement store.

  When adjusting the adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b, the ball entering one of the operation ports (the first operation port 8040 or the second operation port 8070) is completely blocked, and the game ball enters only the other operation port. Instead of being configured to allow balls, it is also possible to make adjustments so that game balls can be inserted into both operation ports and the ratio of entering balls is different.

  For example, as the adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are tilted in the right direction when viewed from the front, the ratio of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 8000 to the first operation port 8040 can be increased. On the other hand, as the adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are tilted in the leftward direction when viewed from the front, the ratio of the game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 8000 to the second operation port 8070 can be increased. Therefore, by varying the adjustment degree of the adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b, an individual in which the probability variation state is likely to continue (a game ball is likely to enter the second operating port 8070) or an individual in which the probability variation state is difficult to continue is provided. Can do. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player select a table more seriously, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a table before playing the game.

  In the distribution prize winning device 8000 of this modification, the switching valve 702 is deleted, so that the type of the short-time state cannot be switched during the game, but the configuration can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, since the time-shortening identification flag 203cs can be deleted, the process of switching the opening pattern of the electric accessory 8010 with reference to the time-shortening identification flag 203cs in the time-short state of the normal symbol, or the value of the time-shortening identification flag 203cs at the end of the big hit The processing set according to the jackpot type can be deleted. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced.

  Note that the distribution prize device 8000 in the present modification may be applied to the distribution prize device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the panel configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. Thereby, the freedom degree of design of the pachinko machine 10 can be raised more.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the following, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, various concepts of the invention included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Switch between V-chosen lottery route and continuous lottery route in the attacker)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery means for executing a lottery, a winning opening to which a first privilege that is advantageous to the player by entering a game ball is given, and a gaming ball enters the winning opening A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state; and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is the second state. In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing from a state to the first state, a first entrance area that is disposed inside the winning opening and into which a game ball that has entered the winning opening can enter, Based on the second entrance area different from the first entrance area and the game ball entering the first entrance area, a second benefit different from the first benefit is granted, and the first Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the two entry areas, the first privilege and the second privilege The first entry state that enables entry into the first entry area and the second entry according to the benefit granting means that gives different third benefits and the timing at which the variable means is varied by the variable control means. A gaming machine A1 having switching means for switching between a second entry state in which an entry into a region is possible.

  Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, lottery of the type of jackpot game based on the predetermined area through which the game ball has passed by passing the game ball through a predetermined area provided on the game board. There is known a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is started according to the type of the jackpot game selected. The lottery ratio for the type of jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas, and the player selects one of the plurality of predetermined areas and allows the game ball to pass. A gaming machine in which the type of jackpot game is selected has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In this case, the player's interest can be enhanced until the bonus game, a bonus game, is granted, but after the jackpot game is granted, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. was there.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a specific lottery result is obtained, the second privilege or the third privilege can be given in addition to the first privilege at the timing when the variable means is varied by the variable control means. Therefore, even after a specific lottery result is obtained, it is possible to be interested in the granted privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first pitch area and a second flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the second pitch area in the winning opening. The switching means has a distribution member that can be varied between a first distribution state in which the game balls that have entered the winning opening are distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path; A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it comprises at least a variable control means for changing the distribution member to one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state at a predetermined timing.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the flow path to be distributed varies depending on the state of the distribution member, so that the pleasure of predicting the state of the distribution member is given after a specific lottery result is obtained. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first rotating body that is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of entering areas in which game balls including the first entering area can enter, and is arranged in the winning opening. And a second rotating body having a plurality of entrance areas in which a game ball including the second entrance area can enter, and at least a period during which the game ball can enter the winning slot. A gaming machine A3 comprising a rotation control means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A2, the first entrance area of the first rotating body that rotates in a predetermined direction and the second of the second rotating body that rotates in a predetermined direction. It can be noticed whether the ball enters any of the entrance areas. Thereby, since a player pays attention to rotation with a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body, there exists an effect that the interest of a player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a specific winning port configured to allow a game ball different from the winning port to enter, a pitched state in which a game ball can enter the specific winning port, and the pitch Specific variable means that can be changed to a restricted state that makes entering more difficult than the state, and the variable control means is configured to change the variable when the lottery means determines that the specific lottery result is obtained. The game machine A4 is characterized in that either one of the means and the specific variable means is selected and variably controlled from the second state to the first state or the restricted state to the entering state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the winning port to which the second privilege or the third privilege is given is varied by the variable means, or the specific winning port that is not so is Any one of the variable by the specific variable means is selected. Thereby, the player pays attention to which one of the prize winning opening and the special winning opening is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (2 lottery of V accuracy and continuation)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery means for executing a lottery, a winning opening to which a first privilege that is advantageous to the player by entering a game ball is given, and a gaming ball enters the winning opening A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state; and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is the second state. And a variable control means for varying the state from the state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game machine is disposed inside the winning opening, and a gaming ball that has entered the winning opening can enter the game. A second bonus different from the first bonus based on one incoming zone, a second incoming zone different from the first incoming zone, and a game ball entering the first incoming zone. A first decision means for deciding whether or not to grant a game ball into the second entry area And a second determining means for determining whether or not to provide a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege, and determining the first entrance area of the second entrance area. Arranged on the upstream side, when a game ball enters the first entry area and the second privilege is not granted by the first determination means, the entered game ball is designated as the second entry area. A gaming machine B1 having a guideway for guiding to the game machine.

  Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, lottery of the type of jackpot game based on the predetermined area through which the game ball has passed by passing the game ball through a predetermined area provided on the game board. There is known a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is started according to the type of the jackpot game selected. The lottery ratio for the type of jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas, and the player selects one of the plurality of predetermined areas and allows the game ball to pass. A gaming machine in which the type of jackpot game is selected has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In this case, the player's interest can be enhanced until the bonus game, a bonus game, is granted, but after the jackpot game is granted, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. was there.

  According to the gaming machine B1, even when the player enters the first entrance area and the second privilege is not granted, the game ball is guided to the second entrance area and the third privilege is granted. An opportunity can be given to the player whether or not to be determined. Thereby, during the game in which the first privilege is given to the player, it is possible to produce an effect as to whether the second privilege or the third privilege is given to the player. Therefore, various effects can be given to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine B1, a first rotating body that is arranged in the winning opening and has a plurality of entering areas in which game balls including the first entering area can enter, and is arranged in the winning opening. A second rotating body having a plurality of entrance areas in which a game ball including the second entrance area can enter, and the first rotation in a period in which the game ball can enter at least the winning opening. A gaming machine B2 having a rotation control means for rotating the body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, the first entry area of the first rotating body that rotates in a predetermined direction and the second entry area of the second rotating body that rotates in a predetermined direction. You can focus on whether you are entering a ball. Thereby, since a player pays attention to rotation with a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body, there exists an effect that the interest of a player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific winning opening configured to be able to enter a game ball different from the winning opening, a entering state in which a gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening, and the entering state Specific variable means that can be changed to a restricted state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and when the variable control means determines that the specific lottery result is the lottery means, the variable means or the One of the specific variable means is selected, and the game machine B3 is variably controlled from the second state to the first state or from the restricted state to the entering state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the winning port to which the second privilege or the third privilege is given is varied by the variable means, or the specific winning port that is not so is the specified variable means Any one of which can be varied is selected. Thereby, the player pays attention to which one of the prize winning opening and the special winning opening is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

<Characteristic C group> (Selectable pachinko)
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first area in which a game ball that has passed through the passage opening can enter, a second area different from the first area, and the first area The first granting means capable of imparting a first game value based on the game ball having entered the game field, and the first zone based on the game ball having entered the second area. A ratio of the second giving means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value and the game balls having passed through the passage opening into each of the first area and the second area And an adjusting means capable of adjusting the game machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of entrances into which game balls can enter are arranged and a game ball enters the entrance, A gaming machine configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to a player is known (for example, JP 2010-269071 A). In this case, the amusement store side cannot set the number of prize balls, etc., and must purchase a gaming machine in which the number of award balls suitable for the sales method of the amusement store, the jackpot probability, etc. are preset. First, to change the sales method, etc., it was necessary to purchase a new gaming machine suitable for the business method.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening into each of the first area and the second area can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, for example, if the adjusting means is adjusted so that the entrance rate to the first area is higher than the second area, it can be set to a gaming machine that is easily given the first gaming value, and the adjusting means By adjusting the first area so that the rate of entering the second area is higher, it is possible to set the gaming machine to be easily given the second game value. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the gaming value that can be given to the player, there is an effect that the gaming value can be changed at a lower cost compared to installing a new gaming machine.

  The gaming machine C1 has a payout means capable of paying out a game ball to a player, and the first number of game balls are inserted into the first area based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area. A second number of game balls different from the first number is paid out as the payout means based on the fact that the payout means pays out as one of the first game values and enters the second area. The gaming machine C2 is paid out as one of the second gaming values.

  According to the gaming machine C2, since a different number of game balls are paid out to the player in each of the first area and the second area, the profit on the game store side is easily adjusted by adjusting the entrance rate by the adjusting means. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when a lottery means for executing the same lottery based on the fact that game balls have entered the first area and the second area, respectively, and when the lottery means has a specific lottery result A gaming machine C3, comprising a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. In other words, since the same lottery is executed in the first entrance area and the second entrance area, different game values are given, so whether the bonus game is executed even if the entrance ratio is adjusted by the adjusting means. It can be configured so that the lottery of no is performed equally. Therefore, even if the game value to be given is adjusted, there is an effect that the game can be performed without changing the degree of expectation for the privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion that can be directly adjusted from outside the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is adjusted by covering the adjusting portion from the front side. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a first state that is difficult and a second state in which the adjustment unit is more easily adjusted than the first state. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, an effect that the adjusting means is illegally adjusted can be suppressed by setting the cover body to the first state. is there.

  In the gaming machine C4, a gaming machine C5, wherein the cover body has a difficulty in visually recognizing the adjustment portion when it is changed to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the state of the adjusting unit becomes difficult to visually recognize because the cover body is changed to the first state by the visually difficult means. There is an effect that a game can be performed without worrying about the gaming machine having the game machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the adjusting means is configured to be capable of adjusting a ball entering width into the first region and a ball entering width into the second region. Game machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C5, the entrance rate can be adjusted by changing the entrance width, so that the entrance rate can be adjusted with an easy operation. is there.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C6, the counting means for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the first area and the second area respectively, and the first area in a predetermined period based on the count value by the counting means Calculating means for calculating the entrance rate for the game ball that has passed through the passage for each of the second areas; and notifying means capable of notifying a calculation result by the calculating means based on establishment of a predetermined condition; A gaming machine C7 characterized by having the following.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C6, it is possible to notify the entrance rate between the first area and the second area when a predetermined condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the actual entrance rate can be confirmed.

<Feature D group>
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first area in which a game ball that has passed through the passage opening can enter, a second area different from the first area, and the first area The first granting means capable of imparting a first game value based on the game ball having entered the game field, and the first zone based on the game ball having entered the second area. The second granting means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value and the ratio of the game balls passing through the passage opening into the first area and the second area respectively. A gaming machine D1 comprising adjustment means that can be adjusted.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to adjust the ratio at which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening enters the first area and the second area by the adjusting means. Therefore, for example, if the adjusting means is adjusted so that the entrance rate to the first area is higher than the second area, it can be set to a gaming machine that is easily given the first gaming value, and the adjusting means By adjusting the first area so that the rate of entering the second area is higher, it is possible to set the gaming machine to be easily given the second game value. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the gaming value that can be given to the player, there is an effect that the gaming value can be changed at a lower cost compared to installing a new gaming machine.

  The gaming machine D1 has lottery means for executing lottery, and the lottery is executed by the lottery means as the first game value and the second game value, and the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In this case, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the lottery as the second game value is more easily given than the lottery as the first game value.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the lottery is executed as the first gaming value and the second gaming value, and the size of the privilege given depending on the lottery result is different. There is an effect that the euphoria can be adjusted by the adjustment by.

  In the gaming machine D2, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means, followed by the stop display with the identification information indicating the lottery result Dynamic display means, first storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of identification information indicating the lottery results for the first game value, and dynamics of identification information indicating the lottery results for the second game value A second storage unit storing a plurality of display modes, and a dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit from the first storage unit or the second storage unit A gaming machine D3 having an aspect determining means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the identification displayed on the display means when the game ball enters the first area and when the game ball enters the second area The dynamic display mode of information can be made different, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided to the player by adjusting the adjusting means.

  The gaming machine D2 or D3 has probability setting means for setting the specific lottery result and the probability of being drawn by the lottery means, and the second game value is more than the lottery as the first game value. When the lottery results in the specific lottery result, it is easier for the probability setting means to set a higher lottery probability than normal time.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the first area and the second area are set such that the ratios at which higher lottery probabilities are set than usual are different. There is an effect that it is possible to easily adjust the profit of the amusement store by adjusting to the store.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion that can be directly adjusted from outside the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is adjusted by covering the adjusting portion from the front side. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a first state that is difficult and a second state in which the adjustment unit is more easily adjusted than the first state. D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, an effect that the adjusting means is illegally adjusted can be suppressed by setting the cover body to the first state. is there.

  In gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6, wherein said cover body has visual difficulty means for making said adjustment part difficult to visually recognize when it is changed to said first state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the state of the adjusting unit becomes difficult to visually recognize because the cover body is changed to the first state by the visually difficult means. There is an effect that a game can be performed without worrying about the gaming machine having the game machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the adjusting means is configured to be capable of adjusting a ball entering width into the first region and a ball entering width into the second region. Game machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the entrance rate can be adjusted by changing the entrance width, so that the entrance rate can be adjusted with an easy operation. is there.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D7, counting means for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the first gaming area and the second gaming area, respectively, and based on the count value by the counting means, the first gaming area Calculating means for calculating the entrance rate in a predetermined period with respect to the game balls that have passed through the passage openings with respect to the second game area, and notifying means capable of notifying a calculation result by the calculating means based on establishment of a predetermined condition; A gaming machine D8, characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D7, it is possible to notify the entrance rate between the first area and the second area when a predetermined condition is established, so that the adjustment is adjusted by the adjusting means. There is an effect that the actual entrance rate can be confirmed.

<Characteristic E group> (Multiple variation with 2 types non-electricity and V accuracy)
Variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the variable entry means is established to satisfy the release condition Based on a variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, Based on the game ball entering the first channel, the first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, and the game ball based on the game ball entering the second channel. The second entry means that enables the entry, the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and the second entry means Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a second determination means for executing a second determination, and the first determination means includes a specific first determination result and A first privilege is given to the player, and a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given when the second discrimination means has a specific second discrimination result. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a bonus game is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the privilege granted by the privilege granting unit is different between the specific first discrimination result and the specific second discrimination result, the player is different between the first channel and the second channel. It is possible to change the expectation of the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means are distributed to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the variable ball entry means And a distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the distribution between the first flow path and the second flow path is varied depending on the distribution state set by the distribution state setting means. There is an effect that the interest can be improved by making the user interested in which distribution state is set.

  In the gaming machine E2, the distribution state setting means determines whether the first distribution state or the second distribution state is based on the determination with the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The game machine E3 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second distribution state based on the specific second determination result than the specific first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, there is an effect that the player can expect that it is a specific second determination result and can improve the interest.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a second variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state. And a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the second variable entry means can enter, and a game state that sets a game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area Setting means, and the privilege granting means is variable until the predetermined condition is established from the second state to the first state, with the second variable entry means being the first privilege or the second privilege. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that in the case of the second privilege, the game machine E4 makes it easier to enter the specific area than the first privilege.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to entertain a player whether or not a gaming ball enters a specific area, and provide novel gaming characteristics. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming state setting means has a probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result as a gaming state advantageous to the player, or the specific determination by the second determination means. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the probability of being discriminated from the second discrimination result is set higher than usual.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4, the probability that the gaming state setting means discriminates from the specific second discrimination result is set high, so that the second discrimination specific to the player in a short period of time is set. Since it is easily discriminated from the result, there is an effect that there is a change in the game and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state in which a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being ruined by setting the gaming state in which the privilege game is executed by the gaming state setting means.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first flow path, the first ball entry means is brought into a state in which a game ball can enter, and the first ball entry means Based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered, the first entrance means makes it difficult for the game balls to enter, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first flow path, The first entry means is made in a state where a game ball can enter, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry means based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first entry means. And a gaming machine E7, characterized in that it has means for making a state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be stably entered into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. There is an effect that the played game can be executed.

<Feature F group> (G type)
Variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the variable entry means is established to satisfy the release condition Based on a variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, Distributing means that can distribute the game ball that has entered the variable entrance means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball that has entered the variable entrance means is the first A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to be distributed to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to be distributed to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path Based on the above, the first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, and the game ball can enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path The second ball entry means, the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. On the basis of the above, the second determination means for executing the second determination, and the first privilege game is executed when the first determination means has a specific first determination result, and the second determination means is specified. The gaming machine F1 has a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when the second determination result is obtained.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a bonus game is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed when the specific second determination result is higher than the specific first determination result, the game machine F1 is set to the second distribution state. There is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the distribution state setting means according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. The gaming machine F2 is characterized by having a ratio varying means for varying the set ratio set in the above.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1, according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the first distribution state and the second distribution Since the ratio set to any of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified depending on not only the determination result but also the game state.

  In the gaming machine F2, a plurality of gaming states are set as the gaming state, and one of the plurality of gaming states is set based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A gaming machine F3 having selection setting means for selecting and setting the gaming state of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F2, one gaming state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved by giving interest not only to the discrimination result but also to the set game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a second variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state. A special area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area A gaming machine F4 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is an effect that a game can be performed that expects whether or not to enter a specific area and the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine F4, the privilege granted by the privilege granting unit sets the probability of being distinguished from the specific first discrimination result or the probability of being discriminated from the specific second discrimination result until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F4, the probability of being distinguished from the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result can be varied, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. .

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is reached, the specific first is continued until the end condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine F6, comprising special state setting means for setting a determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result to be higher than usual.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is possible to make the player worry about whether or not the end condition is satisfied, thereby improving the interest of the game. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (The ratio can be changed by the number of time reductions)
Variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and the variable entry means is established to satisfy the release condition Based on a variable control means for changing from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, Distributing means that can distribute the game ball that has entered the variable entrance means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball that has entered the variable entrance means is the first A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to be distributed to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to be distributed to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path Based on the above, the first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, and the game ball can enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path The second ball entry means, the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. On the basis of the above, the second determination means for executing the second determination, and the first privilege game is executed when the first determination means has a specific first determination result, and the second determination means is specified. A bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game, and the first bonus game or the second by the bonus game executing means. An advantageous setting means that makes it easy for the release condition to be satisfied until the end condition is satisfied after the bonus game is ended, and the end condition is made different between the specific first determination result and the specific first determination result. And a setting means for setting. Machine G1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a bonus game is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the advantage and disadvantage of the player can be varied according to the difference in the period until the end condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the end condition is established based on the fact that the number of times that the first determination and the second determination are executed is the number set by the setting means. A gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the end condition is set by the number of times the first determination and the second determination are executed, so that the specific first determination result or the specific second There is an effect that the discrimination result and the probability to be discriminated can be easily changed by the end condition.

  In the gaming machine G2, the setting means variably sets the set number of times according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, since the set number of times is variably set according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the gaming machine G3 is interested in the set gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the distribution state setting unit and the first distribution state according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine G4, characterized by comprising ratio variable means for varying a set ratio set to the second distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ratio at which the first distribution state and the second distribution state are set varies between the first determination and the second determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in which of the discrimination is made, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Give short time even after rushing with a blender)
A game ball for a first flow path, a second flow path different from the first flow path, a distribution means for distributing the game ball to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to be distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to be distributed to the second flow path, and a game ball enters the first flow path Based on the above, the first entrance means for allowing the game ball to enter, and the second entrance for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the second flow path. And a first discriminating unit for executing a first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering unit, and a game ball entering the second ball entering unit. And a second discriminating unit for executing the second discriminating and a player having a specific first discriminating result by the first discriminating unit or a specific first discriminating result by the second discriminating unit. A privilege game executing means for executing a special game, and a right for the player to execute the bonus game when the second determination means results in a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result. Special game execution means for executing a special game for entering a game ball into an area where a game ball can enter the specific area where the special game is given, and when the special game is given, A gaming machine H1 comprising: setting means for setting one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state after the game is executed.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a bonus game is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the game can be diversified because the first distribution state and the second distribution state can be switched when a special game is given via a special game. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, an opening that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a second state in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the first state are movable. A gaming machine H2 comprising a movable member and movable means for moving the movable member from the second state to the first state based on execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1, a special game is executed, so that a game ball can enter the opening, so that a special state can be given to the player. There is an effect that can be given a fresh taste.

  The gaming machine H2 has switching means for switching between a guidance state for guiding the game ball that has entered the opening to the specific area and a non-guidance state for not guiding the game area to the specific area. Machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, since the state of entering the specific area is switched, there is an effect that gambling can be easily controlled.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game machine can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state. The variable ball entry means distributed by the distribution means to either the one flow path or the second flow path, and the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an open condition. A gaming machine H4, comprising: variable control means for changing; and state setting means for setting a state in which the release condition is easily satisfied until an end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, a state in which the release condition is easily established is set, so that the specific first determination result or the specific second is determined depending on the period in which the termination condition is established. There is an effect that a game can be diversified by substantially changing a probability of a discrimination result.

  In the gaming machine H4, the end condition is satisfied when the number of times that the first determination and the second determination are executed is the number set by the state setting means. Machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, the end condition is established when the number of times that the first determination and the second determination are executed is the number set by the state setting means. There is an effect that interest can be given to the number of times set by the state setting means.

  In the gaming machine H5, when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed, the state setting unit sets the number of times determined in advance by the setting unit as the end condition. A gaming machine H6 characterized by setting a state in which an opening condition is easily established.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H5, the state setting means can determine the number of times determined in advance by the setting means when the first distribution state is set after the bonus game is executed. Is set to a state in which the opening condition is easily established, and the interest can be improved.

<Feature I group> (Discussion)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, a first flow area where the game ball can flow down, and a second area where the game ball flowing down the first flow area is difficult to flow and the game ball can flow down The game ball is directed toward one of the first flow-down area and the second area by changing the firing strength of the launching means based on the player's operation and the partition means for partitioning the game area into A launch adjusting means that can be fired by the launching means, a first throwing means that is provided in the first flow-down area and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball that is provided in the second flow-down area. A second ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a first discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. Second discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the entered ball, and the first discriminating hand It is possible to set one of a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state based on the fact that the first determination result is determined by It is possible to determine one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the possible first setting means and the fact that the second determination means has determined a specific second determination result. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the second setting means, the first setting means, and the second setting means have different ratios for setting the first gaming state.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a bonus game is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probability variation gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the ratio at which the first gaming state is set differs depending on whether the game ball is caused to flow down in the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area. It has the effect that it can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, a third incoming means different from the first incoming means or the second incoming means, a first state in which a game ball can enter the third incoming means, and a first state thereof A variable member that can be changed to a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball, and a predetermined condition is established from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a condition for opening the variable member. Variable means for varying the first and second guiding flows that are advantageous to the player than the first guiding flow path, and the first guiding flow path that is advantageous to the player for the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means. When the first gaming state is set, the first guiding flow is distributed by the allocating unit when the first gaming state is set and when the first gaming state is set. And a distribution control means for facilitating distribution of the game balls to the road. Game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1, when the first gaming state is set, the gaming ball is easily distributed to the first guiding channel by the distributing means. There is an effect that the game can be executed while expecting the player to set the game state.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, a means for setting a normal game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state is set in a normal game, and the first game state or the second game state is set. And a means for facilitating the fulfillment of the release condition.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set so that the release condition is easily established, so that the advantages of the game in stages. There is an effect that can be varied.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, first variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult, and an open state in which the game ball can enter and difficult to enter. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first guide channel, the first variable ball entry means can be changed from the closed state to the open state based on a second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a closed state. And in the open state, the first variable means for changing the closed state after a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first variable ball entry means, and the game ball in the second guide channel The second variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state based on the fact that the ball has entered, and when the ball is in the open state, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second variable ball entry means. Second variable means for changing to the closed state after entering the ball, and the first variable The discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the variable entry ball means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the game ball entering the second variable entry means. A gaming machine I4, wherein discrimination is performed.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first ball or ball can be stably entered into the first ball ball entry means and the second ball ball entry means, thereby stabilizing the first discrimination or the second discrimination. This makes it possible to give the player more opportunities for discrimination.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result A gaming machine I5 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the bonus game is executed, so that the player determines that it is a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result. There is an effect that can be expected.

  In the gaming machine H5, the bonus game executing means is more advantageous in that the bonus game executed based on the specific second determination result is more game than the bonus game executed based on the specific first determination result. A game machine H6 that is more advantageously executed by a person.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H5, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by expecting a specific second discrimination result.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the first variable entry means is located at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area is easier to enter than the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area. The second variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow-down region is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first flow-down region. This is a gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the player can enter the gaming ball into the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means without changing the operation. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, a first viewing state and a first viewing state thereof having a rendering unit capable of executing a predetermined rendering and easily viewing each of the first downstream area and the second downstream area Based on a visual variable means that can be changed to a second visual state that is more difficult to visually recognize, and a player's selection operation, one of the first flow area and the second flow area is displayed in the second visual field. And a visual variable control means for varying the state from the state to the first visual state.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the first downflow area or the second downflow area can be visually recognized by the player's selection operation. There is an effect that the area can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine I8, the selection operation is based on a flow-down area where a game ball has flowed down by the launching means.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize which flowing area the gaming ball launched by the launching unit has flowed down.

  The gaming machine I8 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the selection operation is to operate the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that the flow area selected by the player can be recognized easily.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets a probability variation gaming state in which a lottery result is advantageous after a bonus game is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the interest of games.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game fun.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first ball and a second channel different from the first channel, and the first channel and the second channel. A distribution means capable of distributing to one of them, and a distribution for setting a first distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path Based on the state setting means, the first ball entry means for allowing the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the first flow path, and the game ball having entered the second flow path Based on the second ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, the first discrimination means for performing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance means, a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination, and a specific first discrimination result or the second discrimination means by the first discrimination means A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a more specific first determination result is obtained, and a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result by the second determination means; A special game execution means for executing a special game that causes a game ball to enter a region where the game ball can enter a specific region to which the player is given the right to execute the privilege game. Setting means for setting one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state after the special game is executed when the special game is awarded. Is.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein an opening part into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the opening part, and a first state thereof A movable member movable to a second state in which it is difficult to enter, and a movable means for moving the movable member from the second state to the first state based on execution of the special game, It is what has.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 2, wherein the gaming ball that has entered the opening is guided to the specific area and is not guided to the specific area. It has switching means for switching.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, in which the gaming ball can be entered and the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the opened state. A variable entry means that can be changed to a closed state, and the entered game ball is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path by the distribution means; Variable control means for changing the means from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an open condition, and a state setting means for setting a state in which the open condition is easily established until an end condition is satisfied It is.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the game ball is placed in one of the first flow path, the second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path and the second flow path. Allocable distribution means, and distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first flow path, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path, the first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, Second ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the means, a second determination means for executing a second determination and a specific first determination result by the first determination means or a specific first determination by the second determination means When the determination result is a special game determination unit that executes a special game advantageous to the player and the second determination unit results in a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, Special game execution means for executing a special game for allowing a game ball to enter a region where the game ball can enter a specific region where the right to execute the privilege game is given to the player, and the special game When a privilege game is granted, the game has a setting means for setting one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state after the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and a movable member that is movable between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. And a movable means for moving the movable member from the second state to the first state based on the execution of the special game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which a gaming state that has entered the opening is guided to the specific area, and a non-guided state that is not guided to the specific area. It has a switching means to switch to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball can be varied between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the open state. Variable ball entry means distributed by the distribution means to any one of the second flow paths, and variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an open condition And state setting means for setting a state in which the release condition is easily satisfied until an end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 2 Right first entrance (first entry means)
64b Right second entrance (second entry means)
S675, S677 first discrimination means, second discrimination means
S1105 privilege game execution means
S772, S773, S774 distribution state setting means
702 switching valve (sorting means)
704 First operation port (first flow path)
707 Second operation port (second flow path)
S1191 special game execution means
S4194, S4195 setting means

Claims (2)

A first flow path through which game balls can flow and a second flow path different from the first flow path;
Sorting means capable of sorting to one of the first channel and the second channel;
A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path;
A first ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has not entered the first flow channel or the second flow channel to enter based on the game ball having entered the first flow channel; ,
A second ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has not entered the first channel or the second channel to be able to enter based on the game ball having entered the second channel; ,
First discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball that has not entered the first flow path or the second flow path entered the first ball entry means. When,
Second discriminating means capable of executing second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball that has not entered the first flow path or the second flow path has entered the second ball entering means. When,
Benefits advantageous to the player when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result or the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result Bonus game execution means for executing a game;
When the second determination means gives a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, a game ball enters the specific area where the player is given the right to execute the bonus game. Special game execution means for executing a special game that allows a game ball to enter a possible area;
A setting means for setting one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state after the special game is given a right to execute the special game and the special game is executed; A gaming machine characterized by having the following.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means capable of displaying the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result.

Images